bvp900 950 Pim

Sony Corporation
printed in Japan SONY

NTSC / PAL
Studio/OB/EFP Camera Family
BVP-900/950 900P/950P Series
Product Information Manual
S
t
u
d
i
o
/
O
B
/
E
F
P

C
a
m
e
r
a

F
a
m
i
l
y
P
r
o
d
u
c
t

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
B
V
P
-
9
0
0
/
9
5
0

9
0
0
P
/
9
5
0
P

S
e
r
i
e
s
MK7171V1SMC99JAN
000X000
1 2 3
00
/00
00
/00
00
/00
BK Y M C
000X000
1 2 3
00
/00
00
/00
00
/00
BK
Specifications
11
138
R C P -7 0 0 /7 0 1 /7 2 0 /7 2 1 /7 3 0 /7 3 1 /7 4 0 /7 4 1 , R e m o te C o n trl P a n e l
Connectors
REMOTE CCU/CNU: 8-Pin
PREVIEW: 8-Pin
I/Oport: 29-pin
Power requirements 30 VDC
Mass RCP-700:1.0 kg (2 lb 3 oz)
RCP-701: 0.9 kg (2 lb)
RCP-720: 1.8 kg (3 lb 15 oz)
RCP-721: 1.7 kg (3 lb 12 oz)
RCP-730: 1.8 kg (4 lb)
RCP-731: 1.9 kg (4 lb 3 oz)
RCP-740: 2.3 kg (5 lb 1 oz)
RCP-741: 2.2 kg (4 lb 14 oz)
Dimensions
RCP-700: 68 (W) x 221 (H) x 127 (D) mm
(2 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 5 inches)
RCP-701: 68 (W) x 221 (H) x 83 (D) mm
(2 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 3 3/8 inches)
RCP-720: 102 (W) x 354 (H) x 127 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 14 x 5 inches)
RCP-721: 102 (W) x 354 (H) x 83 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches)
RCP-730: 102 (W) x 332 (H) x 67 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 13 1/8 x 2 3/4 inches)
RCP-731: 102 (W) x 332 (H) x 67 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 13 1/8 x 2 3/4 inches)
RCP-740: 136 (W) x 354 (H) x 127 (D) mm
(5 3/8 x 14 x 5 inches)
RCP-741: 136 (W) x 354 (H) x 83 (D) mm
(5 3/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches)
B VF -C 1 0 W, E le c tro n ic C o lo r Vie wfin d e r
General
Power requirements 9.3 VDC
Power consumption 1.6 W
Operating temperature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F)
Storagetemperature -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F)
Dimensions 229 (W) x 76 (H) x 215 (D) mm
(9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches)
Mass 530 g (1 lb 3 oz)
Performance
CRT 1.5-inch monochrome
Horizontal resolution 600 TV lines at center
Signal system EIA standards
Indicators REC/TALLY, BATT
Supplied accessories
Microphone x1
Operation manual x1
CONTENTS
1
1
2
3
4
5
INTRODUCTION
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
1-1. Overview
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
1-2. Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) using 12-bit A/D Conversion
...................................................................................................
3
1-3. Sony Design Criteria for Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) Cameras
.......................................................................................
3
1-4. Features of the BVP-900/900P
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
1-6. Optical Head Block
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
1-7. Familiar Digital Command System
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
5
1-8. Automated Set-up
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
A TOTAL SYSTEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
2-1. System Configuration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
2-2. Camera Head
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
2-3. Camera Control Unit
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
2-4. Control System
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
2-5. Viewfinders
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
2-6. BVP-900/900P Optional System Accessories
..................................................................................................................................................................
12
2-7. A New Series of Viewfinders for the BVP-950/950P
...................................................................................................................................................
12
2-8. Rack Mounting of System Equipment
..................................................................................................................................................................................
13
2-9. Basic Connection Examples
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
SONY ADVANCED ELECTRONIC IMAGING TECHNOLOGIES
...............................................................................................................
17
3-1. Industry-first Plug-in Imager Assembly
...............................................................................................................................................................................
17
3-2. Sony CCD Advantages
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
3-3. Power HAD 1000 CCD
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
3-4. High Depth of Modulation
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
3-5. Minimum Aliasing with New Optical Low-Pass Filter
.................................................................................................................................................
18
3-6. High Sensitivity
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
3-7. Invisible Smear Level
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
3-8. Excellent Signal-to-Noise Ratio
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
3-9. Super EVS (Enhanced Vertical Definition System)
.......................................................................................................................................................
19
3-10. Clear Scan and ECS (Extended Clear Scan)
....................................................................................................................................................................
19
SONY ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ADSP)
..................................................................................................................
20
4-1. Basic block diagram
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
4-2. Image Capture
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
4-3. Analog Signal Processing Domain
...........................................................................................................................................................................................
21
4-4. Digital Signal Processing Domain
.............................................................................................................................................................................................
21
BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP
......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
5-1. Full DSP Camera Processing
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
5-2. Precise Handling of Highlight Position
..................................................................................................................................................................................
24
5-3. Outstanding reliability and easy maintenance
..................................................................................................................................................................
29
5-4. Low power consumption
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................
29
CONTENTS
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
CONTROL SYSTEM
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
30
6-1. Sony Camera Command Network System
..........................................................................................................................................................................
30
6-2. Master Set-up Unit - MSU-700
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30
6-3. Camera Command Network Units - CNU-700 and CNU-500
................................................................................................................................
31
6-4. Remote Control Panels - RCP-700 Series
..........................................................................................................................................................................
38
6-5. File System
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
40
6-6. Auto Set-up
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
40
6-7. Control Priority and Parallel Mode
...........................................................................................................................................................................................
40
6-8. S-Bus Control
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
40
WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
44
7-1. Advantages of Sony Wideband Triax Transmission
.....................................................................................................................................................
44
7-2. Triax Cable Information
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
46
SET-UP MENUS
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
47
Function Comparison Chart
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................
54
Location and Function of Parts and Controls
...........................................................................................................................................................
57
(a) BVP-900/900P
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
57
(b) BVP-950/950P
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
63
(c) CA-570/570P
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
66
(d) CCU-700A/700AP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
71
(e) CCU-550/550P
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
74
(f) CNU-700
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
79
(g) CNU-500
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
80
(h) VCS-700
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
81
(i) MSU-700
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
83
(j) RCP-740/741
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
90
(k) RCP-730/731
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
97
(l) RCP-720/721
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
104
(m) RCP-700/701
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
110
(n) RM-B150
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
112
(o) BVF-7700/7700P
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
119
(p) BVF-77/77CE
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
121
(q) BVF-55/55CE
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
123
Specifications
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
125
NTSC
......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
125
PAL
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
131
NTSC/PAL Common Accessories
......................................................................................................................................................................................................
137
3
1-1. Overview
The BVP-900 full-size studio model color video camera and its
companion por table version, the BVP-950, are the flagship models of
the Sony CCD camera system. Developed for both studio and outside
broadcasting applications, this camera system is based on several
independent units, each of which has its own unique function. They
include pickup devices, camera heads, camera control units, a video
selector, master set-up units and remote control panels. With the
appropriate choice of units a wide variety of systems can be
implemented - from a single stand-alone camera to installations using
a total of 96 studio and por table models.
(Note: the BVP-900 and BVP-950 are for operation on 525 lines, 60
fields using the NTSC color standard. The BVP-900P and BVP-950P
versions are for operation on 625 lines, 50 fields using the PAL color
standard.)
1-2. Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) using 12-
bit A/D Conversion
Easy set-up and high reliability: With digital processing,
parameters are held in a digital memor y and stay constant for long
periods of time. As a result the need for operator adjustment is
dramatically reduced.
A fur ther advantage of using digital processing is that it is much
easier to implement this circuitr y in ICs and LSIs, achieving benefits
in reliability.
Precise adjustment: The value of camera set-up parameters can be
defined with great precision by digital processing. Moreover,
variations between cameras, which are ver y difficult to avoid in
analog models, can be reduced to a minimum with digital processing
by simply equalizing parameter values.
Flexible signal processing and parameter setting: A significant
advantage of digital processing is that it can provide ver y flexible
operation. Many camera parameters can be controlled and each
parameter setting can be varied over a wide range of values.
1-3. Sony Design Criteria for Advanced Digital Signal
Processing (ADSP) Cameras
DSP cameras have tremendous potential to provide outstanding
improvements in camera operational efficiency. So when considering
the basic design concepts of its new DSP cameras, Sony laid down
the following design criteria.
* The BVP-900 Series must provide higher picture quality than
conventional 10-bit digital cameras. Operationally, it must be
compatible with previous Sony cameras.
* Digital system architecture should be consistent with cur rent 10-
bit digital cameras so that both types can be mixed together
without picture matching difficulties.
* Camera peripherals should have a consistent design approach.
* To take full advantage of 12-bit digitization, as many camera
processes as possible should be digital; par ticularly gamma,
detail and so on.
Sony has taken these design criteria ver y seriously, introducing 12-
bit ADSP cameras with unprecedented per formance and reliability,
and which are largely immune to physical factors such as
temperature changes and time.
Easy-to-change CCD unit: The CCD unit is a separate block from
the camera head, so changing the aspect ratio from 16:9 and 4:3 and
vice versa is simply a matter of exchanging units. No readjustments
are required after the change under normal operating conditions.
The 1038H (NTSC/ PAL) FIT Power HAD1000 CCD Imager is
incorporated in the BVP-900/ 900P. (refer to Section 3)
Easy-to-operate design: The body design inherits the features of
previous generations of Sony cameras. A lower viewfinder position
decreases parallax between the lens and viewfinder. Also, the angle
of view from the camera operators position is wider, as the total
height of the camera is lower.
High picture quality: A newly developed 12-bit/ 36 MHz video-
processing VLSI for broadcasting cameras assures the high quality of
pictures required for a studio-use CCD camera. (refer to Section 4)
High signal-to-noise ratio: A high signal-to-noise ratio of 65 dB
(NTSC)/ 63 dB (PAL) has been achieved as a result of the use of a
top-per forming Power HAD CCD, a new video-processing VLSI and
12-bit A/ D conver ter.
Wide dynamic range: Automatic and manual control of knee point
and knee slope enables the clear reproduction of high-luminance
subjects at up to 600 %of nominal exposure level.
High sensitivity: A sensitivity of F10.0 at 2000 lux with OHB-
750WSA/ P, OHB-730WS/ P and OHB-730/ P (typical) is achieved. For
OHB-750A/ P, F8.0 at 2000 lux (typical) is achieved. When the video
gain is raised by +18 dB, a video level of 100%is obtained with
minimum subject illumination of 5 lux. (OHB-750A/ P: 7.5 lux)
High vertical resolution: The ver tical resolution can be improved
to 450 lines for the BVP-900 (550 lines for the BVP-900P) by use of
the EVS (Enhanced Ver tical Definition System) function. The Super
EVS function, available when a FIT CCD block is installed, enables
the ver tical resolution to be adjusted to a desired value between 400
and 450 lines for the BVP-900 (with an OHB-750A/ 750WSA CCD
Unit installed) or between 480 and 530 lines for the BVP-900P (with
an OHB-750AP/ 750WSAP CCD Unit installed).
High horizontal luminance resolution: 900 TV lines is achieved
with an OHB-750A/ P or OHB-730/ P CCD Unit installed.
Imperceptible vertical smear level: -145 dB by using the well
proven Power HAD 1000 CCD (FIT), with additional technology
enhancements.
Very high depth of modulation: 80%at 5 MHz is achieved.
Automatic set-up and filing function: Built-in microcomputers
give quick and precise automatic set-up, and also reduce the time
required for maintenance. The adjusted data can be stored in the
camera filing system.
Electronic shutter: An electronic six-speed shutter (from 1/ 60 or
1/ 100 second to 1/ 2000 second) is provided with the BVP-900/ 900P.
A rapidly moving object can be clearly shot by selecting the optimum
shutter speed. The shutter also has an ECS (Extended Clear Scan)
function. Using this function, the shutter speed of the BVP-900 can
be adjusted in 510 steps (from 1/ 30 to 1/ 58.3 and from 1/ 60 to
1/ 7000 second), and that of the BVP-900P in 607 steps (from 1/ 25 to
1/ 48.7 and from 1/ 50 to 1/ 9000 second). Appropriate shutter-speed
1 INTRODUCTION
4
selection with use of the ECS function minimizes horizontal streaking
when shooting computer display screens.
Dynamic shading compensation function: When the zoom angle
is changed with the iris aper ture almost completely open, modulation
shading can appear. The BVP-900/ 900P can automatically
compensate for this phenomenon to obtain optimum picture quality
at any zoom position. (This function is activated only when a lens
allowing this function is attached.)
Full range of audio features: The BVP-900/ 900P has two
microphone channels and one program audio channel. A switch on
the camera side panel changes the microphone inputs to accept line
level (-20 dBu) signals. Production and Engineering intercom, and a
program audio channel, are provided.
Self-diagnostic functions: The BVP-900/ 900P has self-diagnostics
functions to facilitate troubleshooting.
Display capability: Characters from a built-in character generator
are used by the BVP-900/ 900P to display zoom position, focus
position, the camera set up status and war ning messages on the
viewfinder screen. A box cursor, center marker, safety zone and
zoom position are also displayed on the viewfinder screen. (refer to
Section 2)
Optional high-resolution 7-inch viewfinders: An optional 7-inch
black-and-white viewfinder (BVF-77/ 77CE) or 7-inch color viewfinder
(BVF-7700/ 7700P) can be used with the BVP-900/ 900P. For easy-to-
see operation, the viewfinder angle can easily be changed and fixed
in the desired position. Attaching and detaching the viewfinder does
not require any tools. (refer to Section 2)
Picture-in-picture capability: The camera picture and the retur n
video picture can be checked simultaneously. With BVF-7700/ 7700P,
both the camera picture and the retur n video picture can be
displayed in color.
High-picture-quality return video: Monitoring a high-quality
retur n video picture on a or color viewfinder is possible because of a
3-line adaptive comb filter. (Monitoring on B/ W viewfinder is also
enabled.)
Reliable transmission using triax cable: The BVP-900/ 900P
supplies wideband component video signals (Y, R-Y and B-Y) to a
CCU-700A/ 700AP Camera Control Unit via a triax cable with high
transmission reliability. The triax cable simultaneously transmits
power, video, audio and control signals between the BVP-900/ 900P
and the CCU-700A/ 700AP. Higher resolution and picture quality are
achieved with this wide bandwidth. (refer to Section 7)
Compact, lightweight and power-saving design: The BVP-
900/ 900P is a compact, lightweight design with low-power
consumption. These are fundamental requirements for outside
broadcast operation.
Precise, flexible and easy picture adjustment: In addition to
conventional camera adjustments, the BVP-900/ 900P features many
new control items. (refer to Section 5)
Easy-to-change CCD unit: The CCD unit is a separate block from
the camera head so that the aspect ratio can be easily changed
between 16:3 and 4:3 simply by replacing the unit. No readjustment
is required after the change under normal operating conditions.
Newly developed LSI: A newly developed digital signal processing
LSI and a 12-bit A/ D conver ter provide comprehensive control
functions and assure a high-quality picture.
High signal-to-noise ratio: A high signal-to-noise ratio has been
achieved by use of a top-per forming Power HAD 1000 CCD,
outstanding circuit design and electronic packaging technology.
Wide dynamic range: Automatic and manual controls of knee point
and knee slope enable high-luminance subjects to be reproduced in
up to 600%of normal light.
High sensitivity: : A sensitivity of F10.0 at 2000 lux (typical) is
achieved with OHB-750WSA/ P, OHB-730WS/ P and OHB-730/ P. For
OHB-750A/ P, F8.0 at 2000 lux (typical) is achieved. When the video
gain is raised by +18 dB, a video level of 100%is obtained with
minimum subject illumination of 5 lux.
High vertical resolution: The ver tical resolution can be improved
to 450 lines for the BVP-950 or to 550 lines for the BVP-950P by use
of the EVS (Enhanced Ver tical Definition System) function. The
Super EVS function, available when a FIT CCD block is installed,
enables the ver tical resolution to be adjusted to a desired value
between 350 and 450 lines for the BVP-950 (with an OHB-
750A/ 750WSA CCD Unit installed) or between 450 and 550 lines for
the BVP-950P (with an OHB-750AP/ 750WSAP CCD Unit installed).
Automatic setup and filing function: Built-in microcomputers
allow quick and precise automatic setup, and also reduce the time
required for maintenance. The adjusted data can be stored in the
camera using a filing function.
Electronic shutter: An electronic six-speed shutter (from 1/ 60 or
1/ 100 second to 1/ 2000 second) is provided with the BVP-950/ 950P.
A rapidly moving object can be clearly shot by selecting the optimum
shutter speed. The shutter also has an ECS (Extended Clear Scan)
function. Using this function, the shutter speed of the BVP-950 can
be adjusted in 510 steps (from 1/ 30 to 1/ 58.3 and from 1/ 60 to
1/ 7000 second), and that of the BVP-950P in 607 steps (from 1/ 25 to
1/ 48.7 and from 1/ 50 to 1/ 9000 second). Appropriate shutter-speed
selection with use of the ECS function minimizes horizontal streaking
when shooting computer display screens.
Self-diagnostic functions: The BVP-950/ 950P has self-diagnostic
functions to facilitate troubleshooting.
Display capability: Characters from a built-in character generator
are used by the BVP-950/ 950P to display zoom position, focus
position, the camera set up status and war ning messages on the
viewfinder screen. A center marker and safety zone are also
displayed on the viewfinder screen. (refer to Section 2)
Optional 1.5-inch, 2-inch or 5-inch viewfinders: A 1.5-inch
black-and-white viewfinder (BVF-10/ 10CE), 1.5-inch color viewfinder
(BVF-C10W) or 2-inch black-and-white viewfinder (BVF-
20W/ 20WCE) can be attached to the BVP-950/ 950P. When a CA-
530/ 550/ 550P/ 570/ 570P Camera Adaptor is attached to the camera,
a high-resolution 5-inch black-and-white viewfinder (BVF-55/ 55CE)
can also be used.
Compact, lightweight and power-saving design: The BVP-
950/ 950P is a compact, lightweight and por table design with low-
power consumption. These are fundamental requirements for outside
broadcast operation.
Precise, flexible and easy picture adjustment: In addition to
conventional camera adjustments, the BVP-950/ 950P features many
new control items. (refer to Section 5)
Optional camera adaptor: The new CA-570/ 570P Camera Adaptor
INTRODUCTION
1
5
provides two independent intercom channels, which is ideal for use
in studio and OB systems. The CA-530/ 530P Camera Adaptor
provides an SDI output for por table digital VTRs. The CA-553 50-pin
Inter face Adaptor provides comprehensive system inter facing, a
DNV-5 Betacam SXVTR or BVV-5/ 5PS Betacam SR
VTR can be
attached for stand-alone operation.
* The previous generation of CCU-370/ 350 Series Camera Control
Units cannot be used with the BVP-950/ 950P.
* A range of four, plug-in Power HAD 1000 CCD imaging capsules
is available for optimum cost/ per formance choice.
* Switchable aspect ratio videos with an OHB-750WSA/ P or OHB-
730WS/ P CCD unit installed.
* Future developments in CCD technology easy to incorporate.
* An additional order of magnitude protection against RFI
(exter nal Radio Frequency Inter ference).
* The BVP-900 Series builds on the well established Sony principle
of common operation. Video engineers accustomed to using the
previous generation of Sony camera command equipment will
find the BVP-900 Series familiar and easy to use.
* High-speed management of digital command data between
camera systems ensures vir tually instant response.
* Flexible reassignment of different camera systems to specific
remote video control panels.
* Central technical super vision of a multiple camera system and
optimum picture matching are readily achieved.
* PC Card - the complete set-up data of the camera and system
configuration information can be accurately stored and retrieved.
* The Sony ISR (Interactive Status Repor ting) system enables
comprehensive and efficient system management to be achieved
from a PC terminal.
* Microprocessor controlled automatic set up capabilities in the
digital domain include:
- shading compensation at black and white video levels.
- automatic hue detection for the skin tone detail function.
- gamma, flare, knee, etc automatically aligned according to the
customers adjustment reference data.
* Menu setting can be done in the field by using the menu switch
on the camera head or with an RM-B150 Hand-held Control
Unit.
1 INTRODUCTION
6
The BVP-900 Series is based on the renowned BVP-700 Series and
DSP technology pioneered by Sony in the earlier BVP-500 Series
camera system. This new system features two camera heads, the
BVP-900/ 900P full-size studio model and a full companion por table
camera, the BVP-950/ 950P. This por table model is designed for full
integration into a BVP-900/ 900P studio camera system, as well as
being used as a standalone acquisition camera in combination with
Betacam VTRs. Figure 2-2 shows how this inter face is provided by
the CA-553 50-pin Camera Adaptor. A variety of key peripherals, such
as the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units help
users to easily expand/ upgrade their system. These peripherals
provide a per fect inter face with the growing ranges of Sony digital
component equipment, such as Betacam SX and Digital BETACAM
products.
2 A TOTAL SYSTEM
STUDIO ZOOM LENS
CCD UNIT
OHB-750A/750AP
OHB-730/730P
OHB-750WSA/750WSAP
OHB-730WS/730WSP
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
BVP-900/900P
BVF-77/77CE BVF-7700/7700P
TRIAX CABLE (*1)
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CCU-700/700P/700A/700AP
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CCU-550/550P(*3) CCU-700/700P/700A/700AP
*2: CCA-5 CABLE LENGTH
CCU-700
CCU-700
CNU-700
200 m
16 0 m
90 m
CNU-700 RCP-700/701
RCP-700/701
RCP-720/721/730
/731/740/741
CCU-700 CNU-700
RCP-720/721/730
/731/740/741
45 m
CCU-700
When the CA-570/570P is connected with the CCU-550/550P, use of intercom transmission channel is
limited to only one channel.
In this case, use the INCOM 1 connector of the CA-570/570P.
When the CCU is connected with the VCS-700, the PIX 2 and WF 2 connectors of the CCU are normally
used. When the CCU-550/550P is connected, use of PIX and WF transmission channels are limited to only
one channel respectively.
In this case, use the PIX and WF connectors for the CCU-550/550P.
*3:
*4:
CNU-700
RCP-720/721/730
/731/740/741
RCP-720/721/730
/731/740/741
RCP-720/721/730
/731/740/741
RCP-700/701/720
/721/730/731/740/741
VIDEO SELECTOR
VCS-700
REMOTE CONTROL
PANEL
RCP-720 RCP-721
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
CCA-5 CABLE
(*2)
CAMERA COMMAND
NETWORK UNIT
CNU-700/500
MASTER SETUP UNIT
MSU-700
CCA-5 CABLE
(max. 200m)
RCP-730 RCP-731 RCP-740 RCP-741
RCP-700 RCP-701
CCA-5 CABLE
(*2)
PIX 2
PIX 2(*4)
WF 2(*4)
WF 2
CCA-5 CABLE
(*2)
CCA-5 CABLE
(*2)
CCA-5 CABLE
(max. 200m)
CCA-5 CABLE
(*2)
PIX
WF
2-inch VF(BVF-20W/20WCE)
1.35-inch COLOR VF(BVF-C10W)
1.5-inch VF(BVF-10/10CE)
ELECTRONIC
VIEWFINDER
BVF-55/55CE
CAMERA ADAPTOR
CA-570/570P
CA-550/1 550P/1
CCD UNIT
OHB-750A/750AP
OHB-730/730P
OHB-750WSA/750WSAP
OHB-730WS/730WSP
For BVP-900/900P
*1: TRIAX CABLE LENGTH
Diamater
8.5 mm
14.5 mm
1000 m
2000 m
700 m
1400 m
Maximum length
CCU-700 CCU-550
Diamater
8.5 mm
14.5 mm
500 m
1000 m
400 m
800 m
Cable-length limitation for
prompter signal transmission
CCU CAM CAM CCU
STANDALONE UNIT
BKP-7910/7910P
SCRIPT HOLDER
BKP-7911/7912
TRIAX UNIT
BKP-7010
RTS KIT
BKP-7913
For BVP-950/950P
For CA-550/550P
ELECTRET CONDENSER MICROPHONE
ECM-MS5
MICROPHONE
C-74
CRADLE SUSPENSION
CRS-3P
TELEPROMPTER UNIT
BKP-5971
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
BVP-950/950P
TRIAX CABLE (*1)
ENG/EFP LENS
OTHER OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
4 : 3
16 : 9
4 : 3
16 : 9
ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER
Figure 2-1 System Configuration
2
1
7
ENG/EFP LENS
REMOTE CABLE
(max. 100 m)
REMOTE
CONTROL
UNIT( )
RM-B150
CCZ CABLE
CCZ CABLE
When the CA-550/550P is connected to the RM-B150, video
signals cannot be output from the MONITOR connector of the
RM-B150.
:
VTR
RECORDER UNIT
DNV-5
CAMERA ADAPTOR
CA-3A
BETACAM
ADAPTOR
CA-553
VIDEO CASSETTE
RECORDER
BVV-5/5PS
REMOTE
CONTROL
PANEL
RCP-700
RCP-701
RCP-720
RCP-721
RCP-730
RCP-731
RCP-740
RCP-741
AC ADAPTOR
AC-550/550CE
CCA-5 CABLE
(max. 50m)
DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE
RECORDER
DVW-250/250P
CAMERA ADAPTOR
CA-570/570P
CA-550/1 550P/1
CA-530
ELECTRONIC
VIEWFINDER
BVF-55/55CE
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
BVP-950/950P
OHB-750WSA/750WSAP
OHB-730WS/730WSP
2-inch VF(BVF-20W/20WCE)
1.35-inch COLOR VF(BVF-C10W)
1.5-inch VF(BVF-10/10CE)
4 : 3
16 : 9
CCD UNIT
OHB-750A/750AP
OHB-730/730P
MASTER
SETUP
UNIT
MSU-700
RETURN VIDEO
SELECTOR
CAC-6
Figure 2-2 System ConfigurationPortable Cameras
2 A TOTAL SYSTEM
8
Front cover (supplied)
BVF-7700/7700P
(with standard hood)
7-inch viewfinder
VFH-770 7-inch Viewfinder
Sports Hood
BKP-7010 Long Triax Kit
BKP-7910/7910P Stand-Alone Kit
(for using the BVP-900/900P as a
stand-alone unit)
BKP-7911/7912 Script Holder
(a script light included)
RCP-700-Series
Remote Control Panel
or
RM-B150
Remote Control Unit
CCA-5 cable
Tripod
V-wedge shoe
(supplied with the tripod)
Triax cable
BVF-77/77CE
(with standard hood)
Zoom lens
OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS/
750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP
CCD Unit
BVP-900/900P
Color Video Camera
1
Figure 2-3 Optional Accessories for BVP-900/900P
2
A TOTAL SYSTEM
9
Caution
It is recommended to use the BVP-950/
950P in combination with the CA-570/
570P Camera Adapter.
If the BVP-950/950P is used with the
CA-550/550P, powering up may not be
executed correctly, depending on the
CA-550/550P version.
If you wish to use the CA-550/550P
instead, please contact your Sony
service representative.
VCT-14
Tripod Adaptor
Tripod
CCA-5 cable
(or the cable
supplied with
the RM-B150)
RCP-700-Series
(or RM-B150
Remote Control Unit)
CA-530
CA-550/1 550P/1
CA-570/570P
Camera Adaptor
BVF-C10W
1.35-inch Viewfinder,
BVF-10/10CE
1.5-inch Viewfinder,
or BVF-20W/20WCE
2-inch Viewfinder
Water-resist cover
Microphone
CAC-12 Microphone Holder
Front cover (supplied)
Zoom lens
OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS/
750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP
CCD Unit
Carrying case
BVP-950/950P
Color Video Camera
Figure 2-4 Optional Accessories for BVP-950/950P
2 A TOTAL SYSTEM
10
2-2. Camera Head
BVP-900/ 900P The BVP-900/ 900P is an outstanding color video
camera which incorporates Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal
Processing) and 12-bit A/ D conversion. Using industr y-first CCD
imager technology, the BVP-900/ 900P is easy to upgrade from the
4:3 standard to switchable 16:9/ 4:3 operation, allowing users to
capitalize on the growth in widescreen programming. Using the
proven Power HAD 1000 CCD with its excellent highlight handling,
the BVP-900/ 900P provides a 900 TV line resolution and achieves the
remarkably low smear level of -145dB (FIT). Just some of the state-of-
the-ar t features are:
* Triple skin tone detail
* Adaptive detail control
* Fine detail
* Electronic soft focus
* Adaptive highlight control
* Knee saturation
* 3-D white shading
* Multi matrix control
* Skin tone auto iris
These improvements contribute to an unsurpassed image quality,
making the BVP-900/ 900P a tr ue top-of-the-line studio/ OB camera.
BVP-950/ 950P The BVP-950/ 950P is the por table version of the
BVP-900/ 900P and has identical video processing circuitr y. Both
models have the same signal per formance and can be controlled
either at the camera head or by remote control through studio
system peripherals such as the CCU-700A/ 700AP Camera Control
Unit, MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit and CNU-700/ CNU-500 Camera
Command Network Units. Because of this design concept, users of
the BVP-950/ 950P have the same features, the same operational
per formance and the same operational feel as the BVP-900/ 900P -
an optimized solution to meet the needs of high-end users for a
companion studio por table camera.
The flexible inter facing of the BVP-900 and BVP-950 (and their
respective 625/ 50 PAL versions the BVP-900P and BVP-950P) means
that they are not only high-end broadcasting cameras with the latest
technology, but they can also be easily integrated into conventional
studio/ OB vehicle systems that use earlier BVP-500 Series cameras.
M a in F e a tu re s o f C a m e ra H e a d s
a ) E x c e lle n t P ic tu re Q u a lity
* Sensitivity F10.0 at 2000 lx with OHB-750WSA/ P, OHB-
730WS/ P and OHB-730/ P
F8.0 at 2000 lx with OHB-750A/ P (3200 K, 89.9%
reflectance)
* S/ N (Typical) 65 dB (NTSC), 63 dB (PAL)
* Resolution 900 TVL (4:3 OHB CCD models)
* Modulation 80%(at 5 MHz), DTL OFF
* Smear level -145 dB (With Power HAD FIT imager installed)
* Total absence of lag and highlight ar tifacts
b ) Wid e b a n d tria x tra n sm issio n
* 10 MHz for luminance channel
* Up to 2000 m cable length (with 14.5 mm cable, with CCU-
700A/ 700AP)
* Up to 1000 m cable length (with 8.5 mm cable, with CCU-
700A/ 700AP)
c ) E n h a n c e d C a m e ra O p e ra to r fu n c tio n s
* Picture in picture (BVP-900/ 900P only)
* Cursor memor y (BVP-900/ 900P only)
* Up to four (BVP-900/ 900P) or four (BVP-950/ 950P with CA-
570/ 570P) selectable retur n video feeds
d ) A d va n c e d in te rc o m syste m
* Individual ENG/ PROD lines
* Microphone system
* PGM audio system
e ) U tility o u tp u ts B VP -9 0 0 /9 0 0 P o n ly)
* Up to 200VA
* 12 V DC output (for script light or wireless microphone receiver)
* Prompter output
f) F u ll c o m p a n io n c a m e ra
* The BVP-950/ 950P por table camera has the same picture quality
and remote operational controls as the studio/ OB camera BVP-
900/ 900P
g ) C o m p a c t size a n d e a sy m a in te n a n c e
* Highly sophisticated mechanical design
* BVP-900/ 900P 20.0 Kg (44 lb 1 oz) (without viewfinder)
* BVP-950/ 950P 3.7 Kg (7 lb 5 oz) (with viewfinder and OHB)
* All boards plug-in for easy maintenance
h ) C o n ve n ie n t re tu rn vid e o se le c t
Up to four retur n video signal can be selected for operational
convenience. Retur n video switches and intercom switch are fitted on
the car r ying handle of the BVP-950/ 950P to suit various shooting
styles.
i) C o m fo rta b le B VP -9 5 0 /9 5 0 P o p e ra tio n
Thanks to a new soft material, the shoulder pad of the BVP-950/ 950P
comfor tably molds to the operators shoulder. It incorporates a
pivoting chest pad and does not require for ward/ backward
adjustment.
The CCU-700A/ 700AP is a camera control unit for use with BVP-900
Series cameras. By incorporating of wideband Triax transmission
system and a digital control system, as well as three optional SDI
outputs, the CCU-700A/ 700AP offers maximum camera per formance
combined with flexible operation. It has been designed to achieve the
highest reliability, afford easy maintenance and allow flexible system
configuration.
The CCU-550/ 550P Camera Control Unit is also available for use
with BVP-950/ 950P por table cameras. A compact body, two SDI
outputs (with a BKP-5972 option fitted) and optional 12 V DC
operation (BKP-5974) make this unit ideal for field use.
M a in F e a tu re s o f th e C C U -7 0 0 A /7 0 0 A P
C a m e ra C o n tro l U n it)
a ) Wid e b a n d tria x tra n sm issio n
* 10 MHz luminance channel for high per formance transmission; 6
MHz for each color difference signals
* Up to 2000 m cable length (with 14.5 mm cable)
2
A TOTAL SYSTEM
11
2 A TOTAL SYSTEM
* Up to 1000 m cable length (with 8.5 mm cable)
* Retur n video (up to 2000 m with 14.5 mm cable and 1000 m
with 8.5 mm cable)
* Prompter video (up to 1000 m with 14.5 mm cable and 500 m
with 8.5 mm cable)
b ) E a sy-to -o p e ra te c o m m a n d syste m
* Immediate response
* Wide range of remote controls
c ) M o n o c o lo r fu n c tio n
* Monochrome video is available to VBS and Y, R-Y and B-Y
outputs
* Hue (360 degrees) and saturation controllable from an MSU-700
Master Set-up Unit
d ) C h a ra c te r d isp la y
* Self diagnostics and other information may be displayed on a
monitor or superimposed on the picture monitoring output
* Characters, such as the camera number, can be superimposed on
the inter nal color bar signal
e ) P o we rfu l se lf-d ia g n o stic s syste m
* ISR system inter face provided
* Triax cable condition and the status of each board can be
monitored
f) C o m p o n e n t S D I o u tp u t o p tio n )
* Three component SDI outputs are optionally available for
inter facing to the ever increasing range of component digital
equipment and facilities
g ) B u ilt-in c o n tra st a n d sa tu ra tio n fu n c tio n s
* Contrast, saturation and chroma on/ off controls provided
h ) F le x ib le in te rc o m syste m
* Individual channels for producer and engineer
* 4W, 2W or RTS selectable by inter nal switch
i) R e m o te ly c o n tro lla b le M I C in p u t g a in c a m e ra h e a d )
* The gain of the two camera head microphone inputs controllable
from the CCU in 10 dB steps (-60 dB ~ -20 dB)
j F lic k e r-le ss se q u e n tia l m o d e R G B ) sta n d a rd fo r WF M o u tp u t
* RGB sequential monitoring without flicker
k ) C o m p a c t size a n d e a sy m a in te n a n c e
* 19-inch wide and 3U high, including camera power supply unit
* Plug-in boards and plug-in power supply unit for easy
maintenance
2-4. Control System
(Please refer to section 6. Control System for fur ther information)
In addition to the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit and eight different
types of RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panels, the CNU-700 and
CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units form the command
ner ve center for a new concept in camera control system. A wide
selection of control peripherals allow each user to configure the most
suitable system to meet a specific operational need. The following are
the key peripherals.
a ) M a ste r S e t-u p U n it M S U -7 0 0 )
The MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit can control up to 6 cameras (up to
12 cameras by using an expansion board) in combination with the
CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit. The adoption of an EL
Touch Panel in the MSU-700 helps to simplify the operation of its
sophisticated control system. And data such as scene files can be
stored in a world-standard PC memor y card.
b ) C a m e ra C o m m a n d N e two rk U n its C N U -7 0 0 a n d C N U -5 0 0 )
The Camera Command Network Units are designed to be the ner ve
center of the Sony camera control system for the BVP-900 Series,
BVP-700 Series, BVP-500 Series and HDC-700 Series of cameras.
They work as Command Selector, Command Distributor and
Command Arbitrator. These two types of camera command network
units give a cost/ per formance choice. The CNU-500 is suitable for
applications with up to six cameras, while the standard six cameras
capability of the CNU-700 can be expanded to 12 cameras with use of
the BKP-7930 optional expansion board. With the BKP-7932 optional
command conversion board installed instead of the BKP-7930, the
CNU-700 can operate with six previous-generation CCU-370/ 355/ 350
units as well as six CCU-700A/ 550 units.
The carefully designed software and the high-speed CPU of both the
CNU-700 and CNU-500 give them a fast response time whatever the
system configuration.
c ) Vid e o S e le c to r VC S -7 0 0 )
The VCS-700 Video Selector is used to switch composite video
monitoring signals from a BVP-900 Series multi-camera system to a
picture monitor and waveform monitor. The VCS-700 accepts the
video monitoring signal from up to six CCU-700A or CCU-550
Camera Control Units and switches these signals to two picture
monitor outputs and two waveform monitor outputs. The selection of
monitoring signals can be controlled by the camera selection buttons
on the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit, or by exter nal control
equipment through the D-sub 37-pin I/ O por t on the VCS-700.
For SDI monitoring, the optional BKP-7933 S-Bus Inter face Board
provides connection to a Sony digital routing system.
d ) R e m o te C o n tro l P a n e ls R C P -7 0 0 S e rie s)
There are four ranges of Remote Control Panel for the BVP-900
Series. Each range has two types - joystick control and dial control.
The RCP-740/ 741 is the top of the range for sophisticated operational
use, and can be used as a substitute for the MSU-700 Master Set-up
Unit in some special applications. The RCP-730/ 731 is the mid-range
model with general control function, especially useful for limited
space with its slim design. The RCP-720/ 721 is also a mid-range unit,
with sufficient control functions for general use. Finally, the RCP-
700/ 701 features the basic control items required for daily operation
of acquisition camera systems. The RCP-730/ 731, RCP-720/ 721 and
RCP-700/ 701 can all be used as a sub-control panel to suppor t an
MSU-700 or RCP-740/ 741.
2-5. Viewfinders
As well as the BVF-77/ 77CE, a high per formance 7-inch
monochrome viewfinder with extremely high horizontal resolution,
the BVF-7700/ 7700P 7-inch high grade color viewfinder is also
available for the BVP-900/ 900P. This high grade color viewfinder is
especially convenient for cases where color needs to be identified by
the camera operator. For the BVP-950/ 950P, a 5-inch monochrome
viewfinder, the BVF-55/ 55CE, is available. All of these models are
ver y compact in size, light in weight and economical in power
consumption. The low mounting positions of the BVF-77 and BVF-
7700 Series provide convenient viewfinder displays aligned as close
as possible to the lens axis.
12
2
A TOTAL SYSTEM
- P ic tu re -in -p ic tu re F u n c tio n in Vie wfin d e r B VP -9 0 0 /9 0 0 P
o n ly)
The viewfinder retur n video signal can be inser ted into any one
of the four cor ners of the viewfinder display. Fur thermore, the
camera and retur n video pictures can be interchanged.
- I n d ic a tio n o f Z o o m P o sitio n
As well as showing the ND/ CC filter positions in the viewfinder,
lens zoom and iris settings can also be displayed, along with
alpha/ numeric status displays.
- Vie wfin d e r B o x C u rso r M e m o ry B VP -9 0 0 /9 0 0 P o n ly)
Three combinations of box H position, V position, height and
width can be memorized and assigned to the three cursor
buttons.
F o r C a m e ra
BKP-7910/ 7910P Standalone unit for the BVP-900/ 900P
BKP-7911 Script Holder, one-page type with lamp, for the
BVP-900/ 900P
BKP-7912 Script Holder, two-page type with lamp, for the
BVP-900/ 900P
BKP-7913 RTS inter face kit for the BVP-900/ 900P
F o r C C U /C N U /M S U
BKP-7311 SDI Output Board for CCU-700A/ 700AP
BKP-7312 SDI Retur n V/ F I/ P Board for CCU-
700A/ 700AP
BKP-7900 Extender Board for CCU-700A/ 700AP and
CNU-700/ 500
BKP-7930 Expansion Board for system expansion up to
12 cameras for the CNU-700
BKP-7931/ 7931P Sub-encoder Board for the CCU-700A
BKP-7932 BVP-370 Series Inter face Board for the CNU-
700
BKP-7933 S-Bus Inter face Board for CNU-700
BKP-5972 SDI Output Board for CCU-550/ 550P
BKP-5973 Control Panel for CCU-550/ 550P
BKP-5974 DC Power Unit for CCU-550/ 550P
CCA-5 Cables 8p-8p cables for the CNU-700/ 500, CCU-700A/ 550,
MSU-700, VCS-700 and RCP-700 Series
CCA-5-3 3 m
CCA-5-10 10 m
CCA-5-30 30 m
CCZ Cables 26pin-26pin VTR cable
CCZ-2 2 m (6.4 ft)
CCZ-10 10 m (33 ft)
Three types of viewfinders can be used with the BVP-950/ 950P
por table camera to provide the choice required in meeting different
applications. These viewfinder models have the following features:
B VF -C 1 0 W E le c tro n ic C o lo r L C D Vie wfin d e r
* 1.35-inch, 16:9 widescreen color LCD viewfinder
* Incorporates 1.35-inch, wide aspect TFT active matrix color LCD
panel with 510,000 dots
* Non-interlace, high ver tical resolution and less flicker by using a
Sony Line Doubler (double-speed conversion)
* High resolution of 400 TV lines in both 16:9 and 4:3 modes with
excellent color gradation to show the finest detail
* 16:9/ 4:3 automatic switching. When used in 16:9 mode, 4:3 limits
and box cursor can be selected to help in shooting 16:9 material
that may be conver ted later into the 4:3 standard
* Peaking is shown in yellow for easy focusing
* Retur n signal can be monitored in color
* World-wide model automatically responds to the video input
standard, NTSC or PAL
* High per formance, triple magnification lens for better visibility
* Removable eye-piece allows direct view of the LCD
* Tally lamp for camera operator is located on the viewfinder body
Photo 2-1 BVF-7700/7700P
Photo 2-2 BVF-55/55CE
so that it can be seen even when not looking at the viewfinder
screen. It can be masked with a sliding cover
* Supplied with an exter nal microphone
B VF -2 0 W N T S C ) /2 0 WC E P A L ) E le c tro n ic B la c k a n d Wh ite
C R T Vie wfin d e r
* 2-inch 16:9 widescreen B/ W CRT viewfinder
* High resolution 600 TV lines at center in both 16:9 and 4:3
modes
* Diagonal size is 1.5-inch in 4:3 mode and 2.0-inch in 16:9 mode to
ensure easy focusing even in 16:9 mode
B VF -1 0 N T S C ) /1 0 C E P A L ) E le c tro n ic B la c k a n d Wh ite C R T
Vie wfin d e r
* 1.5-inch 4:3 standard B/ W CRT viewfinder
* High resolution 600 TV lines at center
* Diagonal size is 1.5-inch to ensure easy focusing
a ) 1 9 -in c h size e q u ip m e n t
The CCU-700A/ 700AP Camera Control Unit, CNU-700 and CNU-500
Camera Command Network Units, and VCS-700 Video Selector can
be mounted in a 19-inch standard EIA rack. These units either mount
directly into the rack or with optional slide rails such as the Sony
RMM-30 Rack Mount Rail. These slide rails allow the unit to be
easily pulled out from the rack and are recommended if you intended
to pull out the unit frequently.
Wa rn in g fo r S a fe ty P u rp o se : It takes two or more people to mount a
unit into a rack. Mounting the unit into a rack by yourself can cause
back or other injuries.
M o u n tin g th e u n it d ire c tly to th e ra c k
Fix the unit to the rack using the rack mount bracket of the unit.
Daily maintenance is easy with the unit mounted with this method.
M o u n tin g th e u n it u sin g th e R M M -3 0 R a c k M o u n t R a il
When the RMM-30 Rack Mount Rail is used, the unit can be
mounted into a rack with a depth of 660 to 830 mm (26 to 32 3/ 4
inches). Proceed as follows:
1 : Pull out inner member while pushing against the stopper
2 : Secure the inner members to both sides of the unit with the
screws (+B4 x 8). Use the screws removed from or supplied
with the unit
Inner member
Stopper
Outer member
12.7
15.9
15.9
12.7
Universal-type rack
12.7
31.75
12.7
Wide-type rack
13
Photo 2-3 BVF-C10W
Photo 2-5 BVF-10/10CE
Photo 2-4 BVF-20W/20WCE
2 A TOTAL SYSTEM
14
3 : Loosen the screw of the bracket of the outer member
4 : Attach the front and rear brackets of the outer member to the
rack. Screws (b), (c) and (d) are supplied with the RMM-30.
Wh e n a 1 U u n it is m o u n te d
1) Attach the front bracket to the inside of the front of the rack at
the screw holes at 15.9 mm (22/ 32 inch) inter vals, using screw
(b) and plate nut (c).
2) Attach the rear bracket to the outside of the rear of the rack at
the screw holes at 31.75 mm (1 5/ 16 inches) inter vals, using
screws (d).
Wh e n a u n it o th e r th a n 1 U h e ig h t is m o u n te d
1) Attach the front bracket to the outside of the front of the rack at
the screw holes at 31.75 mm inter vals, using screws (d).
2) Attach the rear bracket to the outside of the rear of the rack at
the screw holes at 31.75 mm inter vals, using screws (d).
5 : Fasten the screws loosened in step 3.
12.7
12.7
31.75
31.75
12.7
31.75
15.9
15.9
15.9
15.9
12.7
Front
Front
Rear
Rear
Screw b
Screw d
Plate nut
c
31.75
Screw d
Screw d
6 : Pull the rails out.
7 : Inser t the inner member to the outer member while pushing
against the stopper, then fully push the unit into the rack.
Wa rn in g fo r S a fe ty P u rp o se : It takes two or more people to
mount a unit into a rack. Mounting the unit into a rack by
yourself can cause back or other injuries.
8 : Push the unit into the rack, and secure the front panel to the
rack with screws (+RK M5 x 16 to 20) and washers (5).
b ) R C P -7 0 0 S e rie s a n d M S U -7 0 0
The RCP-700 Series and the MSU-700 can be mounted into a 19-inch
rack using an optional drawer. Each type of equipment requires
different par ts to mount it into the drawer. For details, please contact
your local Sony office.
2
RCP-700 Series
Drawer
Cover
2
A TOTAL SYSTEM
15
2 A TOTAL SYSTEM
a ) Vid e o -sig n a l c o n n e c tio n s
When mixing the character signal with the output signal of the VCS-
700, set the SYNC ON/ OFF switch (S7) on the inter nal board of the
CNU-700 to OFF.
7 8 9 10 11 12
CCU
1 2 3 4 5 6
RCP
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
CCU
MSU VCS AUX1 AUX2
AUX4
~AC IN
MSC VCS AUX3
INPUT
COAX
MIX
CH-1 CH-2
RET1 R
G
B
WF1
PIX1
WF2
VBS1
VBS2
VBS3
Y
R-Y
PIX2 SYNC
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
AUX CHARACTER
B-Y
REFERENCE
RET2
RET3
RET4
INTERCOM
REMOTE
CAMERA
RTS
MIC OUTPUT
REMOTE INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
OUTPUT
~
AC IN
INPUT
COAX
MIX
CH-1 CH-2
RET1 R
G
B
WF1
PIX1
WF2
VBS1
VBS2
VBS3
Y
R-Y
PIX2 SYNC
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
AUX CHARACTER
B-Y
REFERENCE
RET2
RET3
RET4
INTERCOM
REMOTE
CAMERA
RTS
MIC OUTPUT
OUTPUT
~
AC IN
1 BVP-900-series camera
CCU-700A/700AP
Return video signal
Reference signal (BB)
Prompter signal
75-ohm terminator
Switcher, monitor
VTR
Reference signal (BB)
75-ohm terminators
CCU-700A/700AP
75-ohm terminator
Picture monitor
Switcher, monitor
VTR
Chroma keyer
Waveform monitor
Character monitor
75-ohm terminator
CNU-700
Reference signal (BB or BS)
VCS-700
Chroma keyer
R
E
T
1
/
R
E
T
2
/
R
E
T
3
/
R
E
T
4
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
P
R
O
M
P
T
E
R
R
E
T
1
/
R
E
T
2
/
R
E
T
3
/
R
E
T
4
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
R
/
G
/
B
Y
/
R
-
Y
/
B
-
Y
W
F
2
/
P
I
X
2
CAMERA
PROMPTER
REFERENCE
RET1/RET2/
RET3/RET4
VBS1/VBS2/VBS3
CAMERA
PROMPTER
RET1/RET2/RET3/RET4
WF1/PIX1
WF2/PIX2
CHARACTER
CHARACTER
PIX A/SYNC
CHARACTER CHARACTER
REFERENCE
WF A/WF MODE
VBS1/VBS2/VBS3
W
F
2
/
P
I
X
2
Y
/
R
-
Y
/
B
-
Y
R
/
G
/
B
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
/
P
R
O
M
P
T
E
R

2 BVP-900-series camera
Figure 2-5
16
2
A TOTAL SYSTEM
b ) C o n n e c tio n o f c o n tro l, in te rc o m , ta lly a n d a u d io sig n a ls
7 8 9 10 11 12
CCU
1 2 3 4 5 6
RCP
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
CCU
MSU VCS AUX1 AUX2
AUX4
~AC IN
MSC VCS AUX3
INPUT
COAX
MIX
CH-1 CH-2
RET1 R
G
B
WF1
PIX1
WF2
VBS1
VBS2
VBS3
Y
R-Y
PIX2 SYNC
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
AUX CHARACTER
B-Y
REFERENCE
RET2
RET3
RET4
INTERCOM
REMOTE
CAMERA
RTS
MIC OUTPUT
OUTPUT
~
AC IN
INPUT
COAX
MIX
CH-1 CH-2
RET1 R
G
B
WF1
PIX1
WF2
VBS1
VBS2
VBS3
Y
R-Y
PIX2 SYNC
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
AUX CHARACTER
B-Y
REFERENCE
RET2
RET3
RET4
INTERCOM
REMOTE
CAMERA
RTS
MIC OUTPUT
OUTPUT
~
AC IN
PREVIEW REMOTE
CCU/CNU AUX
PREVIEW REMOTE
CCU/CNU AUX
~AC IN
POWER
FUSE
I/O PORT
AUX CCU/CNU
REMOTE
1 CCU-700A/700AP
2 RCP-700 series unit
1 RCP-700 series unit
2 CCU-700A/700AP
Microphone signal output
Microphone control and tally
Microphone signal output
Intercom control and tally
Intercom and tally
Microphone control and tally
Intercom and tally
VCS-700
CNU-700
MSU-700
Selection of input signals
Switcher
Intercom control and tally
RTS intercom
RCP/CNU
RCP/CNU
RTS MIC REMOTE
MIC REMOTE
MIC OUTPUT RTS
RTS
CCU 1
CCU/CNU CCU/CNU
PREVIEW PREVIEW
CCU 2
RCP 1 RCP 2 MSU
CCU/CNU
VCS
I/O PORT REMOTE
INTERCOM REMOTE
INTERCOM REMOTE
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM
MIC OUTPUT
Figure 2-6
17
3 SONY ADVANCED ELECTRONIC IMAGING TECHNOLOGIES
The Plug-in Imager Assembly is in the form of a self-contained
imaging subsystem. It is, in essence, a miniature plug-in camera
containing the CCD block and all its suppor t systems. This imager
assembly can be easily removed and installed so that operators with
no special skills can easily exchange imager assemblies in the field.
There are several types of Imager Assembly. The OHB-750A/ 750AP
is a 2/ 3-inch 4:3 FIT type CCD and the 750WSA/ 750WSAP is a 2/ 3-
inch 16:9/ 4:3 switchable widescreen FIT type CCD. For IT types, 4:3
standard screen sized OHB-730/ 730P and 16:9/ 4:3 switchable
widescreen OHB-730WS/ 730WSP are available. The latest Power
HAD technology achieves superior S/ N ratio and extremely low
smear level. One ver y beneficial feature is that no readjustment is
required after exchanging these imager assemblies. This
breakthrough concept also offers a highly cost-effective way of
upgrading CCDs over the camera life span.
O H B -7 5 0 A /7 5 0 A P
4:3 standard image format FIT CCD sensor, with remote control
of its CC/ ND filter.
O H B -7 5 0 WS A /7 5 0 WS A P
16:9/ 4:3 switchable widescreen image format FIT CCD sensor,
with remote control of its CC/ ND filter and aspect ratio
conver ter board.
O H B -7 3 0 /7 3 0 P
Fitted with a 4:3 standard image format IT CCD sensor, with
remote control of its CC/ ND filter.
O H B -7 3 0 WS /7 3 0 WS P
16:9/ 4:3 switchable widescreen image format IT CCD sensor,
with remote control of its CC/ ND filter and aspect ratio
conver ter board.
Since the early 1970s, Sony has remained in the forefront of CCD
OHB-750WSA/750WSAP
16:9/4:3 switchable
620K FIT (PAL)
520K FIT (NTSC)
OHB-750A/750AP
4:3 620K FIT (PAL)
4:3 520K FIT (NTSC)
OHB-730WS/730WSP
16:9/4:3 switchable
620K IT (PAL)
520K IT (NTSC)
OHB-730/730P
4:3 620K IT (PAL)
4:3 520K IT (NTSC)
BVP950/950P
+
CA570/570P
BVP-900/900P
STUDIO/OB COMPANION PORTABLE
STANDARD
ECONOMICAL
Figure 3-1 Optimizing cost / performance choice with alternative OHBs
18
3
imager technology with a sustained, broad-ranging research and
development program. The benefits of this technological
commitment can be seen in the wide range of Sony CCD cameras -
from mass produced types for consumer use to professional cameras
for field and studio operations. The top end of this range has now
been fur ther expanded with the introduction of the Power HAD 1000
16:9/ 4:3 switchable widescreen CCD sensors for the BVP-900 Series.
Total picture per formance is a complex function of many attributes in
imager y. Improvements in overall camera picture quality are a result
of continuing developments of the CCD imager, the CCD suppor t
circuitr y and video processing. As the CCD imager itself remains
central to the direction of recent camera development, enhancements
to the total per formance of CCDs for broadcasting cameras are of
critical impor tance. For this purpose, Sony developed the Power
HAD 1000 and has continuously been refining it ever since.
The Power HAD 1000 CCD has 1038 horizontal picture elements, a
total of 520,000 for NTSC and 620,000 for PAL. Introduced with the
previous generation of cameras, the BVP-500 Series, Sony improved
the Hyper HAD 1000 CCD to complement 10-bit DSP. For the new
top of the line BVP-900 Series, Sony has developed a totally new and
outstanding design of CCD imager to complement its 12-bit ADSP for
the following reasons.
H ig h p ic tu re q u a lity
With its extremely high pixel count, the Power HAD 1000 provides a
horizontal resolution of over 900 lines, a high depth of modulation of
80%and minimum aliasing. Sony advanced semiconductor
technologies also give the Power HAD 1000 high sensitivity and ver y
low smear - despite its large number of picture elements. With the
inherent high level of picture quality provided by this imager, the
precise picture adjustment capability of digital cameras becomes
even more impor tant.
E x c e lle n t m a tc h in g o f C C D a n d c a m e ra to d ig ita l e n viro n m e n t
The Power HAD 1000 has not just been developed to provide
excellent picture quality. When developing a CCD for digital cameras,
the relationships between CCD drive clock frequency, digital signal
processing sampling rate and the digital VTR sampling rate have to
be considered. Simple relationships between these three parameters
result in easy signal conversion from CCD output to digital video
signal, in tur n reducing the complexity of the digital LSIs and
reducing camera power consumption. The 18 MHz clock frequency
of the Power HAD 1000 was chosen to fulfill this requirement. It has
a direct relationship to the 18 MHz and 36 MHz sampling rates in the
camera and a simple, 4/ 3 relationship, to the 13.5 MHz sampling
frequency of the Digital BETACAMformat.
The high packing density achieves an excellent depth of modulation
per formance of 80 %at 5 MHz.
Incorporating the Power HAD 1000 in the BVP-900 Series involves an
extremely high sampling rate of 18 MHz. This high clocking rate, in
combination with precision CCD spatial offset and the exclusive
design of the new optical low-pass pre-filter, reduces aliasing to a
level never achieved in previous generations of CCD cameras.
The power HAD 1000 CCD imager inherits the OCL (On-Chip-Lens)
technology used in all other Sony broadcast-range cameras. The OCL
layer of the CCD chip effectively concentrates the incident light on
Photo 3-1 Sony leading technology used in these CCDs is applied in the
Power HAD 1000 imager
Photo 3-2. Sony Power HAD 1000 CCDs
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0.2
0
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
RESPONSE
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY (MHz)
Pbo (2/3")(QX3457)
Pbo (1-1/4")(XQ3430)
Power HAD (520,000 pixels)
0.8
Overrall Y Response
(with Optical LPF, without Lens)
cf2: Pbo (1-1/4")(XQ3430)
cf1: Pbo (2/3")(QX3457)
0
Figure 3-2. Depth of Modulation characteristic
19
the photo sensor area by precisely positioning a microlens over each
pixel. As a result, the camera sensitivity is doubled, achieving a
figure of F10.0 at 2000 lux with OHB-750WSA/ P, OHB-730WS/ P and
OHB-730/ P. (F8.0 with OHB-750A/ P.) The following Figure 3-5
shows how the OCL enhances sensitivity.
The OCL layer in the Power HAD imager effectively concentrates the
incoming light on the photo sensor so that leakage of light is greatly
reduced. The direct result of this is a ver y low smear level (even on
the IT sensors). This fur ther improvement of the masking
techniques in the Power HAD 1000 (FIT) has reduced the smear to a
level of -145 dB (FIT), which is invisible. The following Figure 3-4
and 3-5 shows the new techniques.
The superior str ucture of the Power HAD imager greatly contributes
to a reduction in the dark cur rent noise to 1/ 10 of that in the
previous generation of CCDs. This gives a cor responding reduction
in the fixed patter n noise, maintaining low noise characteristics in all
imaging situations. In combination with an advanced CCD suppor t
system, the Power HAD 1000 incorporated in the BVP-900 Series
achieves the excellent signal-to-noise ratio of 65 dB (typical) for
NTSC and 63 dB (typical) for PAL.
The basic Enhanced Ver tical Definition System (EVS) can sometimes
cause line flicker due to the increase in ver tical definition. Super
EVS, which is available on BVP-900 Series cameras fitted with FIT
sensors, allows the ver tical resolution to be enhanced over a range of
400 to 450 lines for NTSC and from 450 to 530 lines for PAL This is
achieved by changing the charge mixing ratio in the CCD read out.
This function is remotely controlled from the MSU-700 Master Set-up
Unit and permits the balance between ver tical resolution and motion
blur to be optimized for different scene contents, while keeping line
flicker to a minimum.
The well proven Clear Scan and ECS functions eliminate banding
effects when shooting monitor displays by allowing the shutter speed
to be adjusted so that it exactly matches the various scanning
frequencies that are in use. For FIT CCDs, the Clear Scan shutter
speed range is 60.1 to 7000 Hz for NTSC and 50.2 to 9000 Hz for
PAL, the ECS range is 30.4 to 58.3 Hz for NTSC and 25.4 to 48.5 Hz
for PAL. For IT CCDs it is 60.1 to 7000 Hz for NTSC and 50.2 to 9000
Hz for PAL. The ECS function is especially effective for shooting
computer displays that have ver tical scanning rates below 60 Hz.
Al
Si
Al
Si
On-Chip-Lens
P+ P+
N+
N+
2nd
P-Well
Hole Accumulated Layer
1st P-Well
C.S
(Channel
stop)
V-register
Sensor
Sensed light
R.O.G
(Read out gate)
N-Substrate
Figure 3-3 On-chip-lens structure
P+ P+ P+
N+
N+
C.S
(Channel
stop)
V-register Sensor R.O.G
(Read out
gate)
Figure 3-4 Smear Pattern of the previous generation of CCDs
Si
Ai
Si
Ai
P+ P+ N+
N+
2nd
P-Well
Masking
1st P-Well
Hole Accumulated Layer
C.S
(Channel
stop)
V-register
Sensor
N-Substrate
R.O.G
(Read out gate)
Figure 3-5 Power HAD 1000 CCD imager
3 SONY ADVANCED ELECTRONIC IMAGING TECHNOLOGIES
20
4
3
4 SONY ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ADSP)
The following diagram shows how Sony has applied its innovative
skills in semiconductor technology to the design of BVP-900 Series
cameras.
4-2. Image Capture
A wide choice of Optical Head Blocks (OHBs) is available for BVP-
900/ 900P and BVP-950/ 950P cameras. Each camera is fitted with one
of four types of 2/ 3-inch IT or FIT Power HAD 1000 CCDs. The Red,
Green and Blue CCD sensors are fixed to the prism block using
CHU
OHB
PROMOTER
TRIAX
R white
shading
B white
shading
B white
shading
R 12-bit
G 12-bit
B 12-bit
R
R Y
VF DTL
R
G
B
R video
G video
B video
G G
B
B
RC-68
(option)
MD-83 DM-97
OHB-750A/WA
AP/APW
AMP
12-bit
A/D
+5v
+2.5v
AMP
12-bit
A/D
+5v
+2.5v
AMP
12-bit
A/D
+5v
+2.5v
D/A
D/A
D/A
D/A
D/A
D/A
D/A
SH IE PR
ARC
ARC
ARC
Pinp
Y/C sep
VF out
select
VF out
TEST out
RM out
TEST out
select
SRAM
RET
YR/-Y,B-Y
RET
PROMP
Figure 4-1 ADSP Block Diagram
21
Spatial Offset Technology to provide higher resolution. The image
captured on the photosensors of each CCD is read out at a clock
frequency of 18 MHz.
Gain boost process is per formed in the analog domain by a Video
Amplifier circuit. After that white balance and pre-knee are processed
with an AD board. The video signal from the CCD, which can have a
dynamic range of 600%of nominal white level, is compressed to
approximately 340%by this pre-knee process and conver ted to a 12-
bit digital signal at an 18 MHz sampling rate. This is the same
sampling frequency as that of the Power HAD 1000 imager.
The camera signal processing is executed in the digital domain in
BVP-900 Series cameras. Within this digital processing, more than 12
bits are used in critical applications such as shading compensation,
image enhancing and gamma cor rection.
As shown in the diagram, three VLSIs are used for processing. In the
SH VLSI, the peak and average levels are measured, together with
other parameter of the video signal. These measurements are sent to
the analog circuits as feedback signals. The PR circuit contains the
main camera processing; gamma controls, knee slope controls and so
on. The RC circuit is used for aspect ratio conversion between 16:9
and 4:3. The ARC is a separate board supplied with widescreen,
switchable, OHB CCDs. The SH, IE, PR and ARC are using the latest
VLSI technologies.
4 SONY ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ADSP)
22
The BVP-900 Series uses 12-bit A/ D conversion based on the latest
LSI technology. This advanced technology has allowed Sony to take a
major step for ward from the 10-bit conversion of its previous
generation of cameras a move that was not possible with earlier
A/ D conver ters and DSP LSIs.
a ) M u lti M a trix
Multi Matrix is a function that electrically adjusts the basic RGB
color taking characteristics of the camera to achieve optimum
colorlimetr y. It makes it easy to match the color of cameras under
multi-camera operations, or to reproduce the characteristics of
another type of camera. It can also be used to manipulate color for a
par ticular special effect. A conventional linear matrix function
provides only six adjustable parameters, with considerable
interaction between their effect on a specific color. Multi Matrix
divides the spectr um into 16 segments, each of 22.5 degrees, for
each of which there is an independent hue and saturation parameter.
Multi Matrix allows the selection of each of these segments, with
separate adjustment of hue and saturation parameters. Operation
flow is as follows:
1) Select Multi Matrix on the paint menu of the MSU-700 Master
Set-up Unit.
2) Tur n the Matrix and the Multi switches to ON.
3) The MSU-700 EL display now shows a representation of the
Multi Matrix as it would appear on a vectorscope. You can
select the desired color phase that you want to adjust.
4) After selection of the color phase, its hue and saturation can
be adjusted.
5 BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP
5
4
RY
BY
saturation
hue
Figure 5-1 Multi Matrix
Photo 5-1 Multi Matrix ON and OFF
O N
N o rm a l
23
b ) A u to K n e e
When the Auto Knee button on the MSU or RCP panel is pressed, it
optimizes the knee point and knee slope for best reproduction of the
high lights. The Adaptive Highlight control function can also be used
in conjunction with Auto Knee.
c ) G a m m a
New 12-bit A/ D conversion defines more precisely the required
gamma characteristic by using a gamma cur ve created from 48
segments. This is in comparison with the 32 segments in the
previous camera range.
d ) B la c k G a m m a
Black Gamma allows control of the linear par t of the gamma
characteristic, providing adjustment of the shadow areas of the
picture during shooting.
e ) B la c k C lip
Improvements in the Black Clip circuitr y have improved the
signal/ noise ratio for more natural reproduction.
f) A u to B la c k /Wh ite
The BVP-900 Series provides per fect accuracy in black and white
balance.
Photo 5-2 Multi Matrix (Vectorscope)
Input signal level
Output signal level
white clip
auto slope
point limit
auto knee circuit
Figure 5-2 Auto Knee curve image
N o rm a l
O N
a ) O p tim ize d b it a ssig n m e n t
The video level up to 260%is processed linearly. Highlights over 260%
are compressed by a pre-knee circuit before A/ D conversion,
providing the most efficient utilization of the 12-bit A/ D conversion
process.
b ) K n e e S a tu ra tio n
Knee Saturation eliminates both the washed out effect and hue
changes in overexposed areas of a picture, providing more natural
color reproduction.
c ) A d a p tive h ig h lig h t c o n tro l A u to K n e e m o d e )
Conventional cameras only have a single knee point/ slope
characteristic. In contrast, the Sony ADSP system has multiple knee
point/ slope characteristics. The camera intelligently monitors the
brightness of all areas of the picture and adapts the knee point/ slope
for optimum reproduction. A typical example is shooting an interior
scene which includes a sunlit exterior seen through a window. This
new function applies only to video levels in excess of the knee point,
the middle and low luminance par ts remaining unchanged.
24
white clip
auto slope
k
n
e
e

p
o
i
n
t

0
k
n
e
e

p
o
i
n
t

1
k
n
e
e

p
o
i
n
t

2
k
n
e
e

p
o
i
n
t

3
k
n
e
e

p
o
i
n
t

n
Output signal level
Intput signal level
Figure 5-3 Knee curve image

5
Photo 5-3 Knee Saturation ON and OFF
Photo 5-4 Adaptive highlight control ON and OFF
N o rm a l
N o rm a l
O N
O N
Moderation (Red)
Enhancement (Blue)
25
d ) Trip le S k in To n e D e ta il C o rre c tio n
Skin Tone Detail Cor rection controls the detail level of those objects
which have specific color tones. The BVP-900 Series allows detail to
be set independently for each of three separate color ranges. Colors
are not limited to skin tones, but can be set for any color. Detail may
be increased or decreased relative to the normal level.
Phase: Sets the color phase for which Skin Tone Detail
Cor rection is activated.
Width: Sets the color width for which Skin Tone Detail Cor rection
is activated.
Saturation: Sets the saturation for which Skin Tone Detail
Cor rection is activated.
RY Width
BY
Phase
Saturation
Figure 5-4 Skin Tone
Detail Correction
Photo 5-5 Triple Skin Tone Detail Correction ON and OFF
N o rm a l
C H 1 O N
C H 2 O N
5
26
e ) A d a p tive D e ta il C o n tro l
The Adaptive Detail Control provides natural detail enhancement on
extreme highlights by automatically altering the amplitude of the
edge signal for those forms of high contrast signals.
Photo 5-6 Adaptive Detail Control ON and OFF
N o rm a l M a g n ifie d
O N M a g n ifie d
27
f) E le c tro n ic S o ft F o c u s
This function is similar to an optical soft filter. By subtracting the
edge enhancement signal from the original video signal, slight
defocussed pictures are created electronically. This is an impor tant
new creative feature that can be used to either complement or
replace the Skin Tone Detail Cor rection function, when more of a
film look is sought for close-ups, etc.
Original
Enhancer
Soft Focus
Figure 5-5 Electronic Soft Focus signal image
N o rm a l
E le c tro n ic S o ft F o c u s O N
D e ta il o ff
Photo 5-7 Electronic Soft Focus ON and OFF
5
28
g ) S k in To n e A u to I ris
A problem with conventional auto iris is that movements of bright
objects in a scene adversely affects facial exposure a news studio is
a typical example. Skin Tone Auto Iris is a function that controls the
auto iris system to ensure a constant video level for a defined human
skin area within the scene. In the news studio example, when the
color phase is adjusted to match the facial tones of the news reader,
the iris now maintains the same video level even if the reader tur ns
the script, or people enter or exit the scene. It is effective for the
other colors in addition to human skin tone.
h ) 3 -D Wh ite S h a d in g C o rre c tio n
The camera picture area is divided into up to 1000 separate zones,
each of which may have different shading value. The cor rection is
automatically interpolated across adjacent zones. This technique
provides precise white shading cor rection over the whole picture
area. The 3D shading mode can be enabled through the camera
maintenance menu, and operates automatically each time white
shading is per formed. Because the camera lear ns and interpolates
the data the accuracy may be improved still fur ther on subsequent
auto shading operations. White shading data should be stored in the
camera OHB file or will other wise be lost when the camera power is
tur ned off.
Conventional Correction
3D Shading Correction
Figure 5-6 Correction curve image
j F in e D e ta il
The Fine Detail function allows the width of the
detail edge to be adjusted without changing the peak
level.*
* E ffe c tive fo r H d e ta ils o n ly.
fine DTL off fine DTL on
Figure 5-7 Signal curve image
29
One of the most impor tant concer ns for broadcasters is the reliability
of equipment. This is considerably improved with Sony digital
processing. In Sony ADSP cameras all the processing parameters are
completely and precisely defined at the design stage, and almost all
the potentiometers are replaced by semiconductor memories.
Consequently, Sony ADSP cameras show extremely stable
per formance, regardless of environmental conditions such as
temperature, humidity, shock and vibration. This high stability,
together with the advantages of the self-contained menu system,
enables the accurate set-up of camera systems easily for regular
realignment to maintain. Finally, a great merit of Sony ADSP cameras
is their advanced self-diagnostic system. BVP-900 Series cameras
detect problems in their digital processing and provide viewfinder
war ning indication. Detailed information, such as identifying the
faulty board, is also shown on the Master Set-up Unit screen and the
Camera Command Network Unit character display to provide easy
and rapid fault location.
To achieve its design aim of complete digital processing, including
digital implementation of the non-linear processing stages, Sony has
developed VLSIs which contain over 1,600,000 actual gates. This
complexity demonstrates the advances that Sony has made in the
application of its semiconductor technology. Despite this complexity,
Sony ADSP cameras approach the same low power consumption as
previous analog por table cameras. This has been made possible by
using the Sony EDA (Electronic Design Automation) system to
optimize the complex camera circuitr y in a shor t time scale and to
incorporate the latest LSI technologies (2.5 V drive and 0.35 m
design r ule) to give a total power consumption of just 20 W for the
BVP-950/ 950P por table camera with an OHB-730 CCD block
installed.
30
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
6
5
6-1. Sony Camera Command Network System
Several decades of TV operations have led to the development of
many alter native operational and engineering philosophies relating to
the deployment of video and technical control and to the monitoring
and routine maintenance of multi-camera studio and OB tr uck
installations. Sony has re-examined the whole of the studio camera
architecture with the goal of str ucturing a far higher degree of
system flexibility. This new architecture is based on:
* High-speed communication of digital control commands
* A considerably augmented Master Set-up Unit, the MSU-700
* The introduction of a power ful technical ner ve center concept -
the camera Command Network Units, CNU-700 and CNU-500
* Electronically assignable camera remote control panels for use
with these camera command network units
6-2. Master Set-up Unit - MSU-700
The Master Set-up Unit (MSU) is the centralized technical control
position for a multi-camera systems. The MSU-700 has been
designed to provide comprehensive and wide ranging technical
super vision and alignment of a complex camera system from a single
centralized panel. If it is desirable in a large program origination
complex to extend this super vision to more than one control location
(for example, separate operational and engineering/ maintenance
control centers) then a number of MSU-700 units can access the
entire camera system. To exercise maximum flexibility in controlling
a multi-camera system, the MSU-700 is designed to work in
conjunction with the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Command Network
Units. However, if a simplified system is desired, the MSU-700 can
also operate as a stand-alone unit. It provides rapid, finger-tip access
to all controls relating to the smooth functioning of an operational
system, including:
* Technical alignment controls for the entire camera chain
* Picture and waveform monitor switching
* System configuration
* Control data filing
E x te n d e d Te c h n ic a l A c c e ss to C a m e ra Vid e o P ro c e ssin g -
A traditional high-end studio/ OB camera chain entails a multiplicity
of technical adjustments. In combination they insure ensure both
optimization of the technical alignment of the RGB video processing
channels and allow a broad degree of control over cer tain critical
video subsystems (such as image enhancement, color reproduction,
dynamic range, etc.). Typically, these technical controls are
segregated into those requiring regular operational access - and are
provided as remote adjustments on video operational panels or
technical control panels - and others, perhaps requiring less frequent
access, which are relegated to screwdriver adjustments on various
circuit boards within the camera head and CCU. This separation
often entailed a degree of protracted (and fr ustrating) re-alignment
when subtle creative readjustments are desired for a par ticular
picture composition.
In the BVP-900 Series camera system, Sony has adopted the
philosophy that all technical controls are impor tant and that remote
access to vir tually all controls on a single control panel would bring
higher operational efficiency. This led to the introduction of the
MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit. To avoid undue complication of the
ergonomics of the panel layout that would result from such extensive
access, a novel Electro Luminescent (EL) sub-panel forms an integral
par t of the overall MSU-700 control panel - Figure 6-1. This menu-
driven touch screen allows remote pre-programmed and logical
access to dozens of technical adjustments. Perhaps no other system
can better illustrate the enhanced degree of centralized control than
that relating to access to the many adjustments required for the
image enhancement system. Depending upon the creative desires of
the program director, the MSU-700 allows highly flexible, finger-tip
access to all critical adjustments, including skin detail control.
The main features of the MSU-700 are given below.
a ) E a sy o p e ra tio n
* Frequently used functions are directly accessed from the panel.
* The following modes can be easily accessed by using the new EL
touch panel display for maintenance and daily operation.
* Paint mode: Various paint items such as White, Black and
Flare are adjustable
* File mode: Storing, retrieving and transfer ring reference
files, lens files and scene files between camera heads on a
PC memor y card
* Maintenance mode: System phase control, CCU video
level alignment, selection of character display from a CNU-
700 and CNU-500, etc.
* Configuration mode: Entire control system configuration,
RCP assignment, etc.
* Card mode: PC memor y card initialize, store to PC
memor y card/ recall from PC memor y card, etc.
* Multi-mode: Setting of multi-camera operation such as All,
Control Priority, Parallel Mode, etc.
b ) M u lti-M S U o p e ra tio n
In a conventional system, a single MSU controls a single studio or
multiple studios. However, in this new control system, multiple
MSUs can be used to remotely control/ super vise a single studio
from different operational engineering and control rooms.
c ) S ta n d a rd switc h
Users standard setting data is easily recalled by pressing the
standard switch.
Photo 6-1. MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit
31
6-3. Camera Command Network Units - CNU-700 and
CNU-500
The CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units are
designed as the technical ner ve center of a Star Shape Network
System where all commands such as All, Control Priority,
Parallel/ Mode, etc. are centralized and distributed to the respective
CCUs of the studio system. They are is fur nished with an RS-232C
por t to provide inter face capability to exter nal systems such as ISR
(Interactive Status Repor ting), exter nal PC or modem and robotics
control systems. They can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack
(3U height for the CNU-700, and 1U height for the CNU-500).
Through the modem or PC, camera data file can be transfer red from
a master camera in a studio to cameras at several remote sites during
a live broadcast.
By employing a RISC-based microprocessor in the CNU-700 and
CNU-500, the communication speed has been greatly improved.
Consequently, real-time control and instant response to MSU-700 or
RCP-700 Series commands have been made possible. With the
combination of one VCS-700 Video Selector with a CNU-700 or CNU-
500, each of six picture and six waveform monitoring video signals
can be handled (and expanded to 96 of each with eight CNU-700
units).
Through a CNU-700 or CNU-500, one RCP can control one CCU
while one MSU is able to control multiple CCUs. All units connected
to the CNU can easily communicate with each other. Because of this
useful new facility, simultaneous control of multi cameras, file
transfer between multi cameras and control from an exter nal device
are now possible.
As a convenient tool for system set-up and maintenance, both MSU
control routing and CNU control assignment can be displayed on a
monitor.
Since the CNU is the ner ve center of a system, it has a bypass facility
to maintain communication between the CCUs and RCPs in the event
of a CNU malfunction or power loss. Therefore, even when the
power unit or AT board of the CNU-700 or CNU-500 has failed,
camera heads and CCUs can be directly controlled from the RCPs to
let program production continue.
As mentioned in Section 2, Total System, the cost versus
per formance balance between the two types of Camera Command
Network Unit allows users to build up systems that meet their
application needs. The CNU-500 is suitable for applications with up to
six cameras, while the CNU-700 can be expanded to handle up to 12
cameras with use of the BKP-7930 optional expansion board.
Alter natively, with the BKP-7932 optional command conversion board
installed instead of the BKP-7930, the CNU-700 can operate with six
previous-generation CCU-370/ 355/ 350 units as well as six CCU-700A
or CCU-550 units. Sophisticated software design and high-speed
CPUs in both types of CNU ensure rapid system response in all
applications.
a ) H ig h -sp e e d d a ta tra n sm issio n ra te s
CNU to MSU/ RCP/ CCU: More than 500 Kbps (Approximately
50 times faster than earlier camera command systems)
Camera Head to CCU: 35 Kbps (Approximately 15 times the
speed of earlier analog camera systems)
b ) S yste m c o n fig u ra tio n
Basic system: Up to six cameras with one CNU-700 or CNU-500
Expanded system: Up to 12 cameras with one CNU-700 with one
BKP-7930 optional board installed
Maximum system: Up to 96 cameras with eight CNU-700 units
(each with an BKP-7930 optional board installed) via I/ O por t on
the rear panel (four MSU-700 Master Set-up Units required).
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
CNU-700 CNU-500
Up to 6 cameras Up to 6 cameras
Number of Cameras connectable Up to 12 cameras with BKP-7930 fitted No
Up to 96 cameras with multi CNU connected No
Up to 6 RCPs Up to 6 RCPs
Number of RCPs connectable Up to 12 RCPs with BKP-7930 fitted No
Up to 96 RCPs with multi CNU connected No
Multi MSU connectable Yes No
Multi VCS connectable Yes No
Other controller connectable Yes Available with optional AUX connector
Programable with remote control Yes No
RS-232C connector for ISR Yes Yes
RS-232C connector for switcher etc.
One No
Two when BKP-7930 fitted No
REF. video in Yes Yes
Character out 2 1
Assignment between RCP and CHU/CCU Free Fixed
Power supply to RCP Yes No (But RCP can be powered from CCU)
Connect to previous generation's
"Yes, when BKP-7932 installed" No
command system such as CCU-370
Height 3 U 1 U
19-inch standard rack mauntable Yes Yes
Table 6-1 A comparison between the CNU-700 and CNU-500
32
6
CONTROL SYSTEM
BVP-900/P
BVP-950/P
CCU-700A/P
CCU-550/P
VCS-700
MSU-700
CNU-700/500
RCP-700 Series
Monitor
Waveform
Monitor
Vector
Scope
B/W monitor
for character
display
Command
Video
Character
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 6-1 CNU-700/500 Basic System Configurations (Up to six cameras with one CNU-700 or CNU-500)
33
BVP-900/P
BVP-950/P
CCU-700A/P
CCU-550/P
VCS-700 (2) VCS-700 (1)
MSU-700
CNU-700
Monitor
Waveform
Monitor
Vector
Scope
B/W monitor
for character
display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Command
Video
Character
RCP-700 Series
BKP-7930
Figure 6-2 CNU-700 Expanded System Configurations (Up to 12 cameras with one CNU-700 with one BKP-7930 installed)
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
34
BVP-900/P
BVP-950/P
CCU-550/P
CCU-700A/P
- New command system
1
2
3
4
5
6
BVP-375/P
BVP-90/P
CCU-370/355/350 Series
- Earlier command system
7
8
9
10
VCS-700 (2) VCS-700 (1)
MSU-700
CNU-700
Monitor
Waveform
Monitor
Vector
Scope
B/W monitor
for character
display
BKP-7932
IRIS AUTO SETUP AUTO
MAN
AUTO
ENG -G B G R
MAN
START
BREAK KNEE DETAIL GAMMA
WHITE
BRACK
MASTER BLACK
MONITOR BEI EOT
ND 0
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
18
9
6
0
FILTER GAIN CALL
TALLY
PANEL ACTIVE
CO
POWER
ON
OFF
PFUV
OFF
MIO ON PGM
INCOM OUTPUT CAM
TEST
AUTO AWB
ABB
MAN
PRESET OFF
ON SHUTTER W/B BAL
2
ON
OFF
CAMERA POWER ALARM CABLE
SHORT OPEN
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CCU-355 ONLY USED WITH
11
MAN
AUTO
ENG -G B G R
MAN
START
WHITE
BRACK
MASTER BLACK
MONITOR BEI EOT
ND 0
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
18
9
6
0
FILTER GAIN CALL
TALLY
PANEL ACTIVE
CO
POWER
ON
OFF
PFUV
OFF
MIO ON PGM
INCOM OUTPUT CAM
TEST
AUTO AWB
ABB
MAN
PRESET OFF
ON SHUTTER W/B BAL
2
ON
OFF
SHORT OPEN
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
12
MAN
AUTO
ENG -G B G R
MAN
START
WHITE
BRACK
MASTER BLACK
MONITOR BEI EOT
ND 0
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
18
9
6
0
FILTER GAIN CALL
TALLY
PANEL ACTIVE
CO
POWER
ON
OFF
PFUV
OFF
MIO ON PGM
INCOM OUTPUT CAM
TEST
AUTO AWB
ABB
MAN
PRESET OFF
ON SHUTTER W/B BAL
2
ON
OFF
SHORT OPEN
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
RCP-700 Series
RCP-3700 Series
Command
Video
Character
Figure 6-3 CNU-700 Mixed Configurations (With New and earlier command system components)
6
CONTROL SYSTEM
35
BVP-900/P
BVP-950/P
CCU-700A/P
CCU-550/P
VCS-700 (2) VCS-700 (1)
VCS-700 (4)
VCS-700 (3)
MSU-700
CNU-700 (1)
CNU-700 (2)
Monitor Waveform
Monitor
Vector
Scope
B/W monitor
for character
display
1
2
6
7
8
12
13
14
18
19
20
24
Command
Video
Character
RCP-700 Series
RCP-700 Series
BKP-7930
BKP-7930
Note:
With the addition of an external camera selector switching panel,
upto 96 cameras with 8 CNU-700s (with BKP-7930 installed) can
be controlled from a single MSU-700.
Figure 6-4 CNU-700 Maximum System Configurations (expandable to 96 cameras)
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
36
BVP-900/P
CCU-700A/P
VCS-700
MSU-700
CNU-700 (1)
BVP-950/P
CCU-550/P
MSU-700
RCP-700 Series
VIDEO CONTROL ROOM
ENGINEERING ROOM
Figure 6-5 Multi-MSU Operation Example (1)
6
CONTROL SYSTEM
37
Supervising a complete system with a supervisiory MSU
BVP-900/P
CCU-700A/P VCS-700
MSU-700
CNU-700
RCP
RCP
STUDIO 1
BVP-900/P
CCU-700A/P VCS-700
MSU-700
CNU-700
STUDIO 2
BVP-900/P
CCU-700A/P VCS-700
MSU-700
MSU-700
CNU-700
STUDIO 3
Supervisory MSU
Figure 6-6 Multi-MSU Operation Example (2)
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
38
c ) C h a ra c te r d isp la y
Information concer ning the camera heads and CCUs connected to
the CNU-700 and CNU-500 can be displayed on a monitor via the
CHARACTER connector. This includes:
* Camera settings
* System connection information
* Results of Auto set-up
* Self-diagnostics information
d ) E m e rg e n c y fe a tu re
In the event of a problem with the CNU-700 and CNU-500, tur ning
their inter nal OPERATION switch to the EMERGENCY position
allows control signals from the remote control panel to be directly
connected to the camera head. In this way, program production can
continue by bypassing the CNU.
6-4. Remote Control Panels - RCP-700 Series
The RCP-700 Series of Remote Control Panels consists of four
ranges, from basic to advanced production control to meet
operational requirements. Each range includes both a joystick type
(e.g. RCP-xx0) and a dial control type (e.g. RCP-xx1).
a ) R C P -7 4 0 /7 4 1
The RCP-740 is a joystick type of Remote Control Panel while the
RCP-741 is a dial type. Both are top of the range models with the full
control functions required for sophisticated operations. All
operational functions, including Paint, can be controlled directly from
the remote control panel rather than by using menu selection as in
the previous model. For some special applications, these RCPs can
be used as an alter native to the MSU-700. Up to three of RCP-
740/ 741 can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack drawer.
b ) R C P -7 2 0 /7 2 1
The RCP-720 (joystick type) and RCP-721 (dial control type) make up
the standard panel range. They include Auto Set-up, Scene File and
normal Painting functions to meet the requirements for middle to
large size studios and OB units. The RCP-720 and RCP-721 are
principally designed for use in combination with MSU-700. Up to four
of these RCPs can be installed in a 19-inch standard rack drawer.
c ) R C P -7 0 0 /7 0 1
The RCP-700 (joystick type) and RCP-701 (dial control type) are
normally used in combination with the MSU-700. However, they can
also be used as a sub-control panel with other types of RCPs to
provide basic red and blue Paint facilities, Master Black and Iris
control in daily operations.
d ) R C P -7 3 0 /7 3 1
The RCP-730 (joystick type) and RCP-731 (dial control type) have a
slim design to fit in a compact space such as 19-inch EIA rack
drawer. They feature an LCD panel for displaying Paint Control
items, and to enhance the ON/ OFF function of the SW Controls such
as Knee, Detail, Gamma, Knee Saturation, Mono Color, Color
Cor rector, etc.
The LED BAR for IRIS display featured on the RCP-740 is also
available on the RCP-730 (but not on the RCP-731 dial control type).
e ) F le x ib le A ssig n m e n t o f R C P s
The CNU-700 is at the hear t of the star-shaped network system. Its
inter nal data routing matrix, controlled from the MSU-700, allows
any RCP to be assigned to control any camera without reconnecting
cables between camera heads and RCPs. Please refer to Figure 6-7.
* Multi camera control from one remote panel
* Parallel control of a camera from multiple remote panels
6
CONTROL SYSTEM
39
- For flexibility, assignments can be easily changed e,g -
CAM 1 controlles from RCP 1&2, CAM 2 controlled from RCP 3&4,
CAM 3 controlles from RCP5, and CAM 5 controlled from RCP 6
BVP-900/P
BVP-950/P
CCU-700A/P
Extremely Flexible Configuration
- When ex-factory -
The assignments between CCUs and RCPs are set as below.
1 CCU 2
2 CCU 2
3 CCU 3
4 CCU 4
5 CCU 5
6 CCU 6
VCS-700
CNU-700
MSU-700
RCP-740/741
R
C
P

1
R
C
P

2
R
C
P

3
R
C
P

4
R
C
P

5
R
C
P

6
VCS 1
MSU 1
BVP-900/P
BVP-950/P
CCU-700A/P
1 CCU 2
2 CCU 2
3 CCU 3
4 CCU 4
5 CCU 5
6 CCU 6
VCS-700
CNU-700
MSU-700
RCP-740/741
R
C
P

1
R
C
P

2
R
C
P

3
R
C
P

4
R
C
P

5
R
C
P

6
VCS 1
MSU 1
Figure 6-7 Flexible Assignment of RCPs
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
40
6-5. File System
An innovative PC memor y card allows users to store and recall
camera and system data including assignment control. Camera
parameters can be individually handled by storing a reference file
and scene file in a commercially available PC memor y card.
Depending on the capacity of the memor y card, a large number of
file groups (each containing up to five scene files and one reference
file) can be stored. Individual customization with this PC memor y
card system enables special ar tistic camera settings to be stored and
recalled immediately.
The file system of BVP-900 Series cameras includes reference file,
scene file and lens file. The reference file stores the standard set-up
data in the auto set-up mode plus the standard setting of those switch
functions which are not executed with the auto set-up mode. The
scene file stores paint data for each scene, and up to five scene files
can be stored in the BVP-900 system. The lens file contains data to
compensate for various er rors induced by the lens, and data on 15
types of standard lens is preset in the factor y. (Up to 50 lens fits.)
The BVP-900 Series detects the type of lens and uses the appropriate
data automatically. If necessar y, the lens data can be modified by
users.
The data to compensate for any er rors induced by the CCD imager
and optical system, such as black shading, white shading, black set
and flare, is separately stored in the optical head block of the OHB-
750A/ 730 Series.
a ) F ile tra n sfe r c a p a b ility
With the file transfer function, reference file and scene file data can
be transfer red among multiple cameras, or between camera heads
and the MSU-700. In a multi-camera operation system, optimum
picture matching is simply and easily achieved by transfer ring the
appropriate camera setting data from the master camera to other
slave cameras via the CNU-700 or CNU-500. Thus, any camera can be
set to a uniform condition once a master camera is specifically
adjusted.
b ) P C m e m o ry c a rd
The complete setting of a camera, including reference file and scene
files, can be stored in a small PCMCIA-standard PC memor y card.
This unique memor y card facility also stores information such as a
complex system configuration assigned from the MSU-700 via the
CNU-700/ 500. Memorized parameters can be accurately retrieved at
any time and from any camera.
6-6. Auto Set-up
BVP-900 and BVP-950 cameras incorporate a sophisticated Auto Set-
up system to adjust the video processing circuitr y parameters for
optimum color matching. In addition to auto white balance, auto
black balance and auto level set-up, the following parameters can also
be adjusted according to a reference file.
* Auto white shading (The shading compensation is achieved with
horizontal and ver tical sawtooth and parabolic waveform as well
as with a digitally synthesized waveform for almost 1000
individual cor rection zones created by DSP.)
* Skin detail auto hue (automatic hue detection for specified color
range, with full skin detail function.)
6-7. Control Priority and Parallel Mode
a ) C o n tro l P rio rity
When a camera system is configured using the CNU-700 or CNU-
500, each camera can be connected in parallel to both an RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panel and the MSU-700 Master Setup Unit,
and is controlled from whichever unit has control priority.
Priority for iris/ master black adjustments only can be obtained, when
the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button on the panel on which the PANEL
ACTIVE button is not lit.
When the MSU-700 is in the panel active status, only the iris and
master black controls inoperative on the MSU-700 can be set by
pressing the lit IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button.
b ) P a ra lle l M o d e
The MSU-700 and RCP-720/ 721/ 730/ 731/ 740/ 741 panels have a
PARA button to select Parallel Mode. When the PARA button of the
unit is pressed and lit, Parallel Mode is activated and all the control
functions, other than the iris/ master black controls, become
operative from both units.
The Parallel Mode can be canceled by pressing the PARA button of
the MSU-700 or RCP-700 Series control panel.
6-8. S-Bus Control
a ) T h e S -B u s C o n c e p t
A fur ther advantage of the Sony camera control system is the S-Bus
control technique, which is based on an original Sony concept.
Studio installations and OB units use digital routers as the ner ve
center for a complete audio/ video system. With Sony system
integration, all the equipment is connected to the Sony digital router
via a LAN, called the S-Bus. With the S-Bus system, control and tally
signals are interlocked so that they, along with video and audio
signals, can be simultaneously switched from a central terminal.
Each input/ output source can be given a name, which can then be
displayed on the source name display panel of a DVS-7000 Series
Video Switcher or on the BKS-R3280/ R3281 Status Character
Display.
One example of the operational advantages of the S-Bus system is
that the routing of input signals to the primar y inputs to a DVS-7000
Photo 6-2 PC Memory Card
6
CONTROL SYSTEM
41
Series Video Switcher can be changed at any time without having to
re-connect cables. Even the source name display, tally signal and tally
display are interlocked and changed automatically.
b ) S o n y c a m e ra c o m m a n d syste m with S -B u s
* C o n tro llin g th e ro u te r fro m a n M S U p a n e l
The digital routers cross point can switched from the MSU-700 by
pressing its camera select button. SDI video monitoring is enabled.
PIX
CNU character
CCU with A/D boad
CCU with A/D boad
CCU with A/D boad
CNU with BKP-7933
PIX WFM
Router
(DVS-V3232 etc.)
Primary Station
SDI
IN1
IN2
IN5 OUT25
SDI Monitor
from MSU camera select
MSU-700
S-BUS BNC
CCA-5
Video BNC
Figure 6-8 Router control from MSU
PIX WFM
5CAM monitor
1CAM monitor
Control 5CAM
Control 1CAM
PIX WFM
4CAM monitor
2CAM monitor
Control 4CAM
Control 2CAM
PIX WFM
3CAM monitor
3CAM monitor
Control 3CAM
Control 3CAM
PIX WFM
2CAM monitor
4CAM monitor
Control 2CAM
Control 4CAM
PIX WFM
1CAM monitor
5CAM monitor
Control 1CAM
Control 5CAM
When the RCP assignment is canged, PIX/WFM video is
also changed automatically.
Figure 6-9 Interlocking RCP and monitor assignment
* I n te rlo c k in g th e R C P A ssig n m e n t a n d WF M /P I X A ssig n m e n t
When the assignment of any RCP is changed from the MSU-700, the
picture and waveform monitoring is also automatically changed to
follow the new ar rangement.
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
42
* C o n tro llin g th e ro u te r fro m a n R C P
Pressing the preview switch on an RCP-700 Series control panel
switches the appropriate digital router cross point. SDI video
monitoring is enabled.
PIX
CNU character
CCU with A/D boad
CCU with A/D boad
CCU with A/D boad
CNU with BKP-7933
PIX WFM
Router
(DVS-V3232 etc.)
Primary Station
SDI
IN1
IN2
IN5
OUT1
OUT2
OUT5
SDI Monitor for RCP
MSU-700
S-BUS BNC
CCA-5
Video BNC
PIX WFM
PIX WFM
Figure 6-10 Router control from an RCP
Figure 6-11 Remote control of the RCP assignment without an MSU-700
S-BUS BNC
CCA-5
Video BNC
CCU
CCU
CCU
PIX WFM PIX WFM PIX WFM
PIX
CNU with BKP-7933
PIX1
PIX1
PIX1
(IN1 to 5) PIX1 video in
(IN13 to 17)WF1 video in
(OUT1 to 5)PIX1 video out
(OUT13 to 17)WF1 video out
CNU
character
WF1
WF1
PIX/WF Monitor for RCP
WF1
IN1
IN2
IN5
IN13
IN14
IN17
OUT1
OUT2
OUT5
OUT13
OUT14
OUT17 Router
(DVS-V3232 etc.)
Primary Station
RCP
Remote Assign
Panel
* C o n tro llin g th e R C P a ssig n m e n t fro m o th e r S -B u s e q u ip m e n t
All S-Bus equipment detects the connection configurations between
camera heads, CCUs and RCPs by communicating with each other.
This means that other S-Bus equipment can change the assignment
of RCPs in a system that does not include an MSU-700
6
CONTROL SYSTEM
43
Figure 6-12 Current tally and S-Bus tally
* C a m e ra n a m e d isp la y o n to C N U
Sony uses a PC as the primar y control station of a digital router.
Each camera can be given a name with this primar y PC, and these
names are then automatically shown on the CNU character display.
* S e ria l Ta lly Tra n sfe r
Decodes S-Bus serial tally signal and for ward to CCU.
* A C N U -7 0 0 re q u ire s a B K P -7 9 3 3 o p tio n fo r S -B u s fu n c tio n a lity.
6 CONTROL SYSTEM
CCU CCU CCU CCU
CNU CNU
CCA-5 cable
BLACK COLOR BKGD SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2
SHIFT
AUX DELEGATION
AUX
AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX EDIT FRAME MEM 1 FRAME MEM 2 M/E1 M/E2 AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
KEY 1 KEY 2 WIPE DME CHR KEY
TOP MENU BKGD TRANS
WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS KEY 1 KEY 2
WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS
DSK DSK WIPE P/P WIPE P/P DSK DME FRAME MEN 2
KEY FRAME PROG DISK STILL PILE CHR KEY SETUP
BKGD MODE FREZE REOUR PIC MOD VIDEO MOD IN OUT
NON- LINER GRAPH LIGHT OFF DME STATS DME SETUP
FRAME MEN 1
DLAG
M/E-1
M/E-2
UTILITY
SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
SHIFT
STATS
PATERN
MODIFY 1
MODIFY 2
DIRECT POSIT USER WIPE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 EXIT
KEY PAD
KEY PAD
KEY PAD
KEY PAD
WIDTH
LUM
SAT
HUE
BLACK COLOR BKGD SHIFT
M/E 2
M/E 2
M/E
M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 1 M/E 2
M/E 1 M/E 2
M/E M/E
ON OVER ON OVER
BKGD DSK DSK 2 DSK DSK 2 KEY
MIX NAM SUPER WIPE
AUTO CUT
FRAMES TRANSITION TYPE
NEXT TRANSITION
ON OVER ON OVER
BKGD KEY KEY 2 KEY
MIX NAM SUPER WIPE
AUTO CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
ON OVER ON OVER
BKGD KEY KEY 2 KEY
MIX NAM SUPER WIPE
AUTO CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
KEY 2 KEY
MATTE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT
LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC
KEY KEY KEY KEY
1 2 3 4
KEY1 KEY2
KEY CONTROL XPT KEY
SHIFT
DME
WIPE
SNAP SHOT 0
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
EFF DISS AUTO TRANS
KEY 2 KEY
KEY KEY KEY KEY
1 2 3 4
KEY1 KEY2
KEY CONTROL XPT KEY
SHIFT
DME
WIPE
SNAP SHOT 0
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
EFF DISS AUTO TRANS
M/E-1
K1
A
B
M/E-2
A
B
M/E
M/E
M/E
M/E M/E
K2
K1
K2
PGM/PST
DSK1
DSK2
PGM
P/P UTIL
DSK 1 DSK 2 PGM/PST
LUM LIN CLEAN PTN KEY PROC
DSK DSK DSK DSK
1 2
3 4
EFF SNAP ALL
M/E
M/E
DME
MASTER E-FILE CONTROL PANEL
RCALL
STORE LEARN
TRANS RATE
0
1 2 3
6 5 4
7 8 9 EFF DIS CLR AUTO TRANS TRIM XPT DSBL
ENTER
LASTX DSK1
1 2
3 4
DSK2
DOWN STREAM KEYER
DSK2
FADE TO BLACK DSK1
DVS-7250system
PGM
DME 1 DME 2
DME 1 DME 2
DME 1 DME 2
DME 1
DME 2
DME 3
DME 4 USER
P/P DSK
PST
RS-422A
S-BUS S-BUS
Tally Decoder Tally Decoder
AUX
BUS
BLACK COLOR BKGD SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2
SHIFT
AUX DELEGATION
AUX
AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX EDIT FRAME MEM 1 FRAME MEM 2 M/E1 M/E2 AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
KEY 1 KEY 2 WIPE DME CHR KEY
TOP MENU BKGD TRANS
WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS KEY 1 KEY 2
WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS
DSK DSK WIPE P/P WIPE P/P DSK DME FRAME MEN 2
KEY FRAME PROG DISK STILL PILE CHR KEY SETUP
BKGD MODE FREZE REOUR PIC MOD VIDEO MOD IN OUT
NON- LINER GRAPH LIGHT OFF DME STATS DME SETUP
FRAME MEN 1
DLAG
M/E-1
M/E-2
UTILITY
SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
SHIFT
STATS
PATERN
MODIFY 1
MODIFY 2
DIRECT POSIT USER WIPE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 EXIT
KEY PAD
KEY PAD
KEY PAD
KEY PAD
WIDTH
LUM
SAT
HUE
M/E 2
M/E 2
M/E
M/E 1
M/E 1
M/E 1 M/E 2
M/E 1 M/E 2
M/E M/E
ON OVER ON OVER
BKGD DSK DSK 2 DSK DSK 2 KEY
MIX NAM SUPER WIPE
AUTO CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
ON OVER ON OVER
BKGD KEY KEY 2 KEY
MIX NAM SUPER WIPE
AUTO CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
ON OVER ON OVER
BKGD KEY KEY 2 KEY
MIX NAM SUPER WIPE
AUTO CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
KEY 2 KEY
KEY KEY KEY KEY
1 2 3 4
KEY1 KEY2
KEY CONTROL XPT KEY
SHIFT
DME
WIPE
SNAP SHOT 0
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
EFF DISS AUTO TRANS
KEY 2 KEY
KEY KEY KEY KEY
1 2 3 4
KEY1 KEY2
KEY CONTROL XPT KEY
SHIFT
DME
WIPE
SNAP SHOT 0
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
EFF DISS AUTO TRANS
M/E-1
K1
A
B
M/E-2
A
B
M/E
M/E
M/E
M/E M/E
K2
K1
K2
PGM/PST
DSK1
DSK2
PGM
P/P UTIL
DSK 1 DSK 2 PGM/PST
LUM LIN CLEAN PTN KEY PROC
DSK DSK DSK DSK
1 2
3 4
EFF SNAP ALL
M/E
M/E
DME
MASTER E-FILE CONTROL PANEL
RCALL
STORE LEARN
TRANS RATE
0
1 2 3
6 5 4
7 8 9 EFF DIS CLR AUTO TRANS TRIM XPT DSBL
ENTER
LASTX DSK1
1 2
3 4
DSK2
DOWN STREAM KEYER
DSK2
FADE TO BLACK DSK1
DVS-7250system
PGM
DME 1 DME 2
DME 1 DME 2
DME 1 DME 2
DME 1
DME 2
DME 3
DME 4 USER
P/P DSK
PST
RS-422A
AUX
BUS
Current Tally S-BUS Tally
44
7 WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION
7
6
7-1. Advantages of Sony Wideband Triax Transmission
To avoid the differential time delays and differential gain that may
arise with RGB systems, the Sony Wideband Triax Transmission
system uses video component signals (Y, R-Y, B-Y). The luminance Y
signal bandwidth is 10 MHz, and that of the color difference signals
is 6 MHz. The color difference signals are transmitted by quadrature
modulation of a signal car rier, providing high efficiency in spectr um
utilization. All components employ full double-sideband amplitude
modulation with synchronous detection. This affords maximum
signal-to-noise ratio and optimum high frequency response.
This component (Y, R-Y, B-Y) transmission method is per fectly suited
to CCD cameras that incorporate Spatial Offset technology for higher
resolution and minimum aliasing. In a component (Y, R-Y, B-Y)
transmission system, the R, B and G signals are linearly summed to
form a luminance (Y) signal before triax transmission. Precise phase
offset is maintained between the R, B and G signals by this spatial
offset process. Thus, the inevitable differential time delays between
channels of an RGB system are avoided.
The Sony Wideband Triax Transmission System provides the
following advantages, when used with the CCU-700A/ 700AP Camera
Control Unit.
* Long triax cable operation, up to 2000 m with 14.5 mm cable
with retur n video (up to 1000 m with 8.5 mm cable)
* Teleprompter video channel up to 1000 m with 14.5 mm cable
(500 m with 8.5 mm cable)
* Skin tone gate transmission for picture monitor
* Outstanding horizontal resolution of 850 TV lines at CCU output
97.25 MHz
5.5 MHz
70M Hz
7M Hz
45M Hz
6M Hz
22.5 MHz
10 MHz
AUDIO
AND
DATA
Y
(QUAD-DSB)
R-Y/B-Y
(QUAD-DSB)
RET VIDEO
(FM)
PROMPTER
(AM)
Skin Gate
(2 MHz)
10 20 40 60 70 90 100
MHz
Frequency Allocation for CCU-700A/P
(Wideband)
CHU CCU CHU CCU CCU CHU
CHU CCU CCU CHU
H
.
C
O
N
T

(
F
O
R

G
E
N
L
O
C
K
)
C
C
U

D
A
T
A
I
N
C
O
M

1
I
N
C
O
M

2
P
G
M
C
A
M

D
A
T
A

&

T
O
N
E
M
I
C

1
M
I
C

2
I
N
C
O
M

1
I
N
C
O
M

2
2.5 3.0 3.6 3.94.3 5.6 6.2 6.7 7.1 7.4
AUDIO and DATA
Figure 7-1 Frequency Allocation for CCU-700A/700AP
45
Standard Bandwidth Triax System
Wideband Triax System
5 MHz 6.7 MHz
Wideband Triax System
Standard bandwidth Triax System
Transmission characteristic
5 MHz
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
6.7 MHz
0.5 dB
- 2.0 dB
Figure 7-2 Transmission Characteristic
Photo 7-1 The rotary type triax connector of BVP-900/900P Photo 7-2 The rotary type triax connector of BVP-950/950P
7 WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION
46
7-2. Triax Cable Information
M a x im u m c a b le le n g th with C C U -7 0 0 A /7 0 0 A P a n d C C U -5 5 0 /5 5 0 P
The maximum cable length can be extended up to 3000 m via 14.5
mm triax cable without retur n video. Range of operation is dependent
upon cable type.
With CCU-700A/700AP With CCU-550/550P
Cable Thickness Max. length Max. length
Mohawk 8.5 mm 1000 m (almost 0.6 mile) 700 m (almost 0.42 mile)
Mohawk 13.2 mm 1500 m (almost 0.9 mile) 1050 m (almost 0.63 mile)
Belden 8.5 mm 1000 m (almost 0.6 mile) 700 m (almost 0.42 mile)
Belden 13.2 mm 1500 m (almost 0.9 mile) 1050 m (almost 0.63 mile)
Fujikura 8.5 mm 1000 m (almost 0.6 mile) 700 m (almost 0.42 mile)
Fujikura 14.5 mm 2000 m (almost 1.2 mile) 1400 m (almost 0.85 mile)
F&G 11 mm 1200 m (almost 0.8 mile) 875 m (almost 0.56 mile)
Table 7-1 Triax cables
7
WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION
47
8 SET-UP MENUS
In Sony DSP cameras, complicated setting up procedures are
vir tually eliminated because all parameters are stored in memor y as
digital values.
In typical system installations these parameters are adjusted using
the MSU or the RCPs. However, both the BVP-900/ 900P and BVP-
950/ 950P can be used in standalone applications and in these
situations control values can be changed using a series of viewfinder
menus. These menus are accessed by using the menu switches on
the camera head. The menu selection for the BVP-900/ 900P is by a
combination of a rotar y encoder and a toggle switch on the rear
control panel. For the BVP-950/ 950P, a convenient rotar y encoder on
the front panel of the camera head is used for menu selection. Both
the BVP-900/ 900P and BVP-950/ 950P have User menus and
Engineering menus. When the menu system is initially accessed, the
Operation Menu pages are displayed. A special combination of the
menu controls allows access to the Top Menu which, in tur n,
provides access to the other menus depending on whether or not
they have been selected by dip switches on the AT board.
Photo 8-1 Rotary menu encoder on the front panel of the BVP-950/950P Photo 8-2 Menu encoder on the rear control panel of the BVP-900/900P
48
The following tables give brief explanations of the menus. For more
detail, please refer to the system manual.
ALL No No No No No Change No Change
Cam Power No No No No No Change No Change
VF Power No No No No No Change No Change
TEST 1 No No No No No Change No Change
TEST 2 No No No No No Change No Change Test 2 waveformis selected at MSU.
Bars No No No No No Change No Change
Close No No No No No Change No Change
Standard No No No No
Knee Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Off No (On) On Yes No No On On
Gamma Off No (On) On Yes No No On On
Chroma Off No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Matrix Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Aperture Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Saturation Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
5600K No No Change Yes No No No Change No Change
Auto Knee Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin Detail Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Gate No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Saturation Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Contrast Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Gamma Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Character No Change No No No No Change No Change
V Mod. Saw Master V Mod.Saw No 0 Clear Yes No Yes To Lens File To Lens File
R,G,B Mod.Saw No 0 Clear Yes No Yes To Lens File To Lens File
V Mod. Saw Off No No Change No No On On
Detail Detail Level Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
limiter Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Crispening Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Level Dep. Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
H/V ratio Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Frequency Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Mix Ratio Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Comb Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White limiter Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black limiter Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Fine Detail Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Aperture Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Off No (On) No Change Yes No No On On
Level Dep. Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Fine Detail Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Aperture On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin Detail Skin 1 Level Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin Detail Skin 1 Phase Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin 1 Width Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin 1 Sat Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin 1 On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin 1 Gate On No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Detail Gate On No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Skin 2 Level Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin 2 Phase Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Item Reference After Reference Scene OHB Lens Standard Level Auto
File Stored File File File
Table 8-1 Function and File table for BVP-900/900P
8
SET-UP MENUS
8 SET-UP MENUS
49
Skin 3 On Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
SAT/CONTRAST Saturation Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Contrast Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Saturation On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Contrast On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Master Black Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
R,G,B Black Yes (G) 0 Clear Yes No No *1 To Ref. File *1) To previous Level Auto Data
Auto Black Balance
White R,G,B White (G)(RGB) No Change Yes No No Depends on WhiteSetup mode
Flare R,G,B Flare Yes 0 Clear Yes No Yes To Ref. File To Ref. File
Flare Off No (On) On Yes No No On On
Gamma Knee Master Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Master Black Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Master Knee Point Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Master Knee Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Black Gamma On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Knee Point Master Knee Point Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
R,G,B Knee Point Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Max On No (Off) Off No No No Off Off
Knee Slope Master Knee Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
R,G,B Knee Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Sat Level Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Sat. On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White Clip Master White Clip Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
R,G,B White Clip Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White Clip Off No (On) On Yes No No On On
Gamma Master Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
R,G,B Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Gamma 0.40 Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Gamma Master BlackGamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
R,G,B Black Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Master Black Gamma C Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Knee Point Limit Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Adaptive Highlight Control Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Knee On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Iris Pattern Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Phase Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
8
SET-UP MENUS
50
Width Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Iris No No Change Yes No No No Change No Change
Normal Mode Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin Mode Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Hue
Auto Iris Gate No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Gate On No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Level Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
APL Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Gain Yes No Change Yes No Yes To Lens File To Lens File Gain is stored to Lens File.
Pattern Select Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
ECS/S-EVS Shutter Speed Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
ECS Speed Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Super EVS Speed Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Shutter On No No Change Yes No No No Change No Change
ECS On No No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Super EVS On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Matrix R-G/G-B/B-R Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
R-B/G-R/B-G Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Preset Matrix Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
User Matrix Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Shading R,G,B H Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R,G,B V Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R,G,B H Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R,G,B V Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
Pattern Select Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
White Shading R,G,B H Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R,G,B V Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R,G,B H Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R,G,B V Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R,G,B 3D Shading No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
OHB Multi Matrix Hue No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
Saturation No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
OHB Matrix On No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Test 2Mode Yes No Change No No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White Setup Mode No No Change No No No No Change No Change
OHB Matrix Correct No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Auto White Shading Mode No No Change No No No No Change No Change
V Detail Correction Mode Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
16:9/4:3 Crop No No Change No No No No Change No Change Installation mode only
V detail Control Mode Yes No Change No No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
ALL No No No No No Change No Change
Cam Power No No No No No Change No Change
VF Power No No No No No Change No Change
Test 1 No No No No No Change No Change
Test 2 No No No No No Change No Change Test 2 waveformis selected at Camera config Menu.
Bars No No No No No Change No Change
Close No No No No No Change No Change
Standard No No No No
Detail Off No (On) On Yes No No On On
Chroma Off No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Knee Aperture Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Saturation Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
5600K No No Change Yes No No No Change No Change
Skin Detail Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Gate No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Saturation Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Contrast Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Gamma Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Character No Change No No No No Change No Change
V Mod. Saw Master V Mod. Saw No 0 Clear Yes No Yes To Lens File To Lens File
R.G.B Mod. Saw No 0 Clear Yes No Yes To Lens File To Lens File
V Mod. Saw Off No No Change No No On On
Detail Detail Level Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Limiter Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Crispening Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Level Dep. Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
H/V ratio Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Frequency Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Mix Ratio Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Comb Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White Limiter Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Limiter Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Fine Detail Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Aperture Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Off No(On) No Change Yes No No On On
Level Dep. Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Fine Detail Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Aperture On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin Detail Skin 1 Level Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Detail Gate On No No Change No No No No Change No Change
8 SET-UP MENUS
51
8
SET-UP MENUS
52
Skin 3 On Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
SAT/CONTRAST Saturation Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Contrast Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Saturation On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Contrast On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Master Black Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
R.G.B Black Yes(G) 0 Clear Yes No No *1 To Ref. File *1) To previous Level Auto Data
Auto Black Balance
White R.G.B White (G)(RGB) No Change Yes No No Depends on WhiteSetup Mode
Flare R.G.B Flare Yes Yes Yes No Yes To Ref. File To Ref. File
Flare Off No(On) On Yes No No On On
Gamma Knee Master Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Master Black Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Master Knee Point Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Master Knee Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Gamma Off No(On) On Yes No No On On
Black Gamma On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Off Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
Knee Point Master Knee Point Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
R.G.B Knee Point Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Max On No Off No No No Off Off
Knee Slope Master Knee Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
R.G.B Knee Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Sat Level Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Knee Sat On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White Clip Master White Clip Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
R.G.B White Clip Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White Clip Off No(On) On Yes No No On On
Gamma Master Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
R.G.B Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Gamma Off No(On) On Yes No No On On
Gamma 0.40 Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Gamma Master Black Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File Data is stored as RGB value.
R.G.B Black Gamma Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Master Black Gamma Or Yes No Change Yes 0 Clear No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Knee Point Limit Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Slope Yes 0 Clear Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Adaptive Highlight Control Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Knee On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Iris Pattern Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Phase Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Width Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Iris No No Change Yes No No No Change No Change
Normal Mode Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Skin Mode Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
53
Auto hue
Auto Iris Gate No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Gate On No No Change No No No No Change No Change
ECS/S-EVS Shutter Speed Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
ECS Speed Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Super EVS Speed Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Shutter On No No Change Yes No No No Change No Change
ECS On No No Change Yes No No No Change No Change
Super EVS On Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Matrix R-G/G-B/B-R Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
R-B/G-R/B-G Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Preset Matrix Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
User Matrix Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Auto Iris Level Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
APL Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Gain No No Change Yes No Yes To Lens File To Lens File Gain is stored to Lens File.
Pattern Select Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
Black Shading R.G.B H Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R.G.B V Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R.G.B H Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R.G.B V Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
White Shading R.G.B H Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R.G.B V Saw No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R.G.B H Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R.G.B V Para No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
R.G.B 3D Shading No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File
OHB Multi Matrix Hue No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
Saturation No No Change No Yes No To OHB File To OHB File Display is set to 0 within OHB fileis stored
OHB Matrix On No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Test 2Mode Yes No Change No No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
White Setup Mode No No Change No No No No Change No Change
OHB Matrix Correct No No Change No No No No Change No Change
Auto White Shading Mode No No Change No No No No Change No Change
V Detail Creation Mode Yes No Change Yes No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
16:9/4:3 Crop No No Change No No No No Change No Change Installation modeonly
V detail Control Mode Yes No Change No No No To Ref. File To Ref. File
8 SET-UP MENUS
54
9 Function Comparison Chart
9
8
BVP-900/P BVP-950/P + CA-570/P
Call Yes Yes
VF monitor select Yes Yes
RET select Yes Yes
Cursor on Yes No
Cursor H-Posi Yes No
Cursor V-Posi Yes No
Cursor width Yes No
Cursor height Yes No
Cursor memory Yes No
Filter local Yes Yes
ND filter select Yes Yes
CC filter select Yes Yes
Safety zone on Yes Yes
Center marker on Yes Yes
Up tally on Yes Yes (VF)
Mix VF on Yes Yes (Menu)
Display Yes Yes
P in P on/position Yes No
Incom mic on Yes Yes
Incom ENG/PROD Yes Yes
Power Yes (Internal) Yes
Zebra No Yes (Menu)
(STAND ALONE FUNCTION)
Gain select Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
Bars on Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
Auto knee on Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
White select Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
Auto WHT Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
Auto BLK Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
Shutter on Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
Shutter SEL Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes
Table 9-1 A comparison between the BVP-900/P and BVP-950/P+CA-570/P
Table 9-2 A comparison between the MSU-700 and RCP-700 Series
55
9 Function Comparison Chart
Camera Power ON/OFF CAM PW CAM PW CAM PW CAM PW
VF Power ON/OFF VF PW VF PW
Test Signal Output Select TEST1/TEST2/BARS TEST1/TEST2/BARS TEST/BARS TEST1/BARS
Recall Standard Setup STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD
Monitor Signal Select (PIX1/WF1 OUTPUT) MONITOR SELECT MONITOR SELECT
Monitor Signal Select (PIX2 OUTPUT) PICTURE MONITOR
Monitor Signal Select (WF2 OUTPUT) WAVEFORM MONITOR
ND/CC Filter Select *a, *b FILTER CTRL/ND/CC FILTER CTRL/ND/CC ND/CC ND/CC O
5600K ON/OFF 5600K 5600K 5600K 5600K O
Auto IRIS Adjustment *c AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO O
Manual Iris Adjustment *c IRIS IRIS IRIS IRIS
Close CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE
Auto Iris Level Adjustment LEVEL O
Auto Iris AP ratio Adjustment APL Ratio O O
Auto Iris Gain Adjustment Iris Gain O
Auto Iris Pattern Select O
Master Gain Select *b MASTER GAIN MASTER GAIN MASTER GAIN MASTER GAIN O O
Auto Black Balance Adjustment *b, *c AUTO SETUP/BLACK ABB or Auto Black AUTO SETUP/BLACK AUTO SETUP/BLACK AUTO SETUP/BLACK
Black Balance Adjustment *c Black BLACK BLACK BLACK O
Auto Level Adjustment AUTO SETUP/LEVEL AUTO Level AUTO SETUP/LEVEL AUTO SETUP/LEVEL AUTO SETUP/LEVEL
Master Black Adjustment MASTER BLACK Black MASTER BLACK MASTER BLACK MASTER BLACK O O
Auto White Balance Adjustment *b, *c AUTO SETUP/WHITE AWB or Auto White AUTO SETUP/WHITE AUTO SETUP/WHITE AUTO SETUP/WHITE
White Balance Adjustment *c White WHITE WHITE WHITE L O
Master/Slave Setting Master/Slave MASTER/SLAVE MASTER/SLAVE MASTER/SLAVE
Black Set Adjustment Black Set O
Auto Black Shading Adjustment Auto B. Shading
Black Shading Adjustment Black Shading O
Auto White Shading Adjustment Auto W. Shading
White Shading Adjustment White Shading O
V Modulation ON/OFF V Mod Saw Off
V Modulation Adjustment V Mod Saw O O
Flare ON/OFF Flare Off
Flare Balance Adjustment Flare/RGB R/G/B FLARE FLARE FLARE O O O
Detail ON/OFF DETAIL OFF Detail Off DTL OFF O
Detail Level Adjustment Level DTL LEVEL DETAIL DETAIL O O
Detail Limiter Adjustment Limiter DTL LIMITER DETAIL O O
Detail Crispening Adjustment Crispening DTL CRISP O O
Detail H/V ratio Asjustment H/V Ratio O O
Detail Boost Frequency Adjustment Frequency O O
Detail Mix Ratio Adjustment Mix Ratio O O
Detail Comb Adjustment Detail Comb O O
White Limiter Adjustment W.Limiter O O
Black Limiter Adjustment B.Limiter BLK LIMITER O O
Level Dependence ON/OFF LVL DEP OFF Level Dep Off O O
Level dependence Adjustment Level Dep O O
Knee Aperture ON/OFF KNEE APERTURE Knee Aperture O O
Knee Aperture Adjustment Knee Apert O O
Skin Detail ON/OFF SKIN DETAIL Skin Detail SKIN DEATIL SKIN DETAIL SKIN DEATIL O O
Skin Detail Level Adjustment Level SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL 1 SKIN DEATIL O O
Skin Detail Phase Adjustment Phase SKIN PHASE SKIN DETAIL 2 O O
Skin Detail Width Adjustment Width SKIN WIDTH SKIN DETAIL 2 O O
Skin Detail Saturation Adjustment Saturation SKIN SAT SKIN DEATIL 2 O O
Skin Detail Gate ON/OFF DETAIL GATE Detail Gate DETAIL GATE DETAIL GATE DETAIL GATE
Skin Detail Auto Hue Adjustment SKIN DTL AUTO HUE Auto Hue SKIN DETAIL AUTO HUE SKIN DEATIL AUTO HUE SKIN DETAIL AUTO HUE
Matrix ON/OFF MATRIX OFF Matrix Off O O
Preset Matrix ON/OFF Preset Matrix O O
User Matrix ON/OFF User Matrix O O
Item MSU-700 RCP-740/741 RCP-730/731 RCP-720/721 File Save
Direct Button Menu Panel R S O L
*a: Local control enabled with BVP-900/900P
*b: Local control enabled with BVP-950/950P
*c: Control enabled from RCP-700/701
*d: CCU-700A/700AP requires BKP-7931 for this functionality
*e: Use IRIS control lever when control from RCP- XX0 Series
56
Function Comparison Chart
9
Item MSU-700 RCP-740/741 RCP-730/731 RCP-720/721 File Save
Direct Button Menu Panel R S O L
Matrix Coefficient Setting R-G/G-B/B-R R-B/G-R/B-G O O
Gamma ON/OFF GAMMA OFF Gamma Off GAMMA OFF O
Step Gamma Setting GAMMA Gamma (0.4, 0.45, 0.5) GAMMA O O
Gamma Balance Adjustment Gamma (RGB) R/B GAMMA R/B GAMMA R/B GAMMA L O
Master Gamma Adjustment Gamma (Master) M Gamma M Gamma M Gamma L O
Black Gamma ON/OFF BLACK GAMMA Black Gamma BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA O O
Black Gamma RGB Adjustment Black Gamma/RGB O O
Master Black Gamma Adjustment Black Gamma/Master BLK GAMMA BLK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA O O
Auto Knee ON/OFF AUTO KNEE Auto Knee AUTO KNEE AUTO KNEE AUTO KNEE O O
Knee ON/OFF KNEE OFF Knee Off KNEE OFF O O
Knee Point RGB Adjustment Knee Point/RGB KNEE POINT L O
Master Knee Point Adjustment Knee Point/Master KNEE POINT KNEE POINT L O
Knee Slope (RGB) Adjustment Knee Slope/RGB KNEE SLOPE L O
Master Knee Slope Adjustment Knee Slope/Master KNEE SLOPE KNEE SLOPE L O
Knee MAX ON/OFF Knee Max
Knee Saturation ON/OFF KNEE SAT Knee Sat O O
Knee Saturation Adjustment Knee Saturation/Level KNEE SAT O O
White Clip ON/OFF White Clip Off O
White Clip Adjustment White Clip WHT CLIP O O
Shutter/ECS ON/OFF *a ON ECS/Shutter ON ON ON O O
ECS/Shutter Mode Select ECS ECS/Shutter ECS ECS ECS O O
Shutter Speed Selection L/M L/M L/M L/M O
ECS Frequency Selection L/M ECS L/M L/M L/M O
Super EVS ON/OFF, Adjustment S-EVS O O
Color Corrector ON/OFF *d COLOR CORRECT Color Correct A/B/C/D/E/F O O
Color Corrector Adjustment *d Phase/Width Hue/Saturation O O
EDTV (Y3/S1) ON/OFF *d EDTV Y3/S1
EDTV (Y3/S1) Adjustment *d EDTV Y3/S1
Comb Filter ON/OFF *d Comb
Comb Filter Adjustment *d Comb Filter Level
Contrast ON/OFF CONTRAST Contrast CONTRAST O O
Contrast Adjustment Contrast CONTRAST O O
Saturation ON/OFF SATURATION Saturation SATURATION SATURATION SATURATION O O
Chroma ON/OFF CHROMA OFF O
Mono Color ON/OFF MONO COLOR Mono Color O
Mono Color Adjustment Saturation/Hue O
Reference File Register *a, *b Reference File
Reference File Transfer Ref. Transfer
Scene File Register/Recall SCENE FILES SCENE FILES SCENE FILES SCENE FILES
Scene File Transfer Scene Transfer
Preview Signal Output PREVIEW *e PREVIEW *e PREVIEW *e
Call Signal Output *a, *b, *c CALL CALL CALL CALL
Character (CCU) Output CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER
Character (CNU) Output CHARACTER Character
57
10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls
(a) BVP-900/900P
S id e P a n e l
1
Power HAD 1000
PROMPTER TEST OUT TRACKER SCRIPT
REMOTE
RET
CONTROL
1
2
CH-1 CH-2
AUDIO IN
1 Up tally lamp
1 Up tally lamp
2 Safety lock
3 Safety lock
2 Safety catch
3 Camera number plate
4 Side-panel lock screws
5 Lens lock and knob
5 Lens lock and knob
6 Cable clamp
7 AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors
8 AUDIO IN selector
9 Microphone power switches
10 PROMPTER connector
11 TEST OUT connector
12 TRACKER connector
13 RET CONTROL connector
14 SCRIPT connector
15 REMOTE connector
16 Accessory
bracket
16 Accessory bracket
1
AC OUT
200VAMAX
REF IN VBS VTR AC OUT DC IN
11 5V.18V
AC OUT
200VAMAX
REF IN VBS VTR AC OUT DC IN
11 5V.18V
4 Side-panel lock screws
6 Cable clamp
18 CCU connector
18 CCU connector
19 REF IN connector
19 REF IN connector
20 VBS connector
20 VBS connector
21 VTR connector
21 VTR connector
22 DC IN connector
22 DC IN connector
17 AC OUT connector
17 AC OUT connector
17 AC OUT connector
17 AC OUT connector
BKP-7910
Stand-Alone
Kit
*1
BVP-900P
BKP-7910P
Stand-Alone
Kit
*1
58
10
1 ) U p ta lly la m p
Illuminates when the camera receives a red tally signal. When the
CALL button on an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series
Remote Control Panel is pressed, and with the CCU CALL switch on
the inter nal MS board set to ON, the lamp illuminates if not already
lit, and is tur ned off if it was illuminated. The brightness of the lamp
is adjustable by a control on the inter nal MS board. To stop the lamp
illuminating, set the UP TALLY switch on the rear panel to OFF.
Attach one of the supplied number plates (0 through 9) to show the
camera number. For details on adjusting the lamp brightness and
attaching the number plate, refer to the system manual.
2 ) S a fe ty c a tc h
Safety catch to prevent the side panel from accidentally opening. To
open the side panel, loosen the side-panel lock screw, slide the safety
catch toward the lens, and open the panel. The side panel
automatically locks as it is closed. For details, refer to the system
manual.
3 ) C a m e ra n u m b e r p la te
Attach the supplied light gray number plate to show the camera
number. For details how to attach a number plate, refer to the system
manual.
4 ) S id e -p a n e l lo c k sc re w
Locks the side panel to prevent it from accidentally opening. Tur n it
fully clockwise.
5 ) L e n s lo c k a n d k n o b
Locks the lens. To attach or detach the lens, tur n the knob fully
counterclockwise until the lever is horizontal. To lock the lens, tur n
the knob clockwise until the lever is ver tical.
6 ) C a b le c la m p
Retains the triax camera cable, accepting cables from 8 to 15 mm in
diameter. For details on how to use the cable clamp, refer to the
system manual.
7 ) A U D I O I N C H -1 a n d C H -2 a u d io in p u t c h a n n e ls 1 a n d 2 )
c o n n e c to rs XL R 3 -p in )
Accept microphone or line level signals.
8 ) A U D I O I N a u d io in p u t se le c t) se le c to rs
Set to the appropriate positions for the equipment connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors.
MIC: When a microphones is connected.
LINE: When a line-level signal source is connected.
9 ) M ic ro p h o n e p o we r switc h e s
Control power fed to microphones connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1
and CH-2 connectors.
+48 V: When the connected microphone requires an exter nal
power source, a +48 V supply is fed to the microphone.
OFF: When the connected microphone does not require
exter nal power.
1 0 ) P R O M P T E R te le p ro m p te r c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
The signal input to the PROMPTER INPUT connector on a CCU-
700A/ 700AP is output from this connector to feed a teleprompter
monitor.
1 1 ) T E S T O U T te st sig n a l o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Outputs the signal selected with the video signal select buttons on
the rear panel, when the TEST OUT switch on the MS board is set to
VF. When the TEST OUT switch is set to RET, the retur n video
signal is output. (The retur n video signal selected last is output.)
When a BKP-7910/ 7910P Stand-alone Kit is installed in the camera, a
composite video signal is output if the TEST OUT switch is set to
VBS.
1 2 ) T R A C K E R c o n n e c to r 1 0 -p in )
Used for communication between the camera operator and tracker
and for intercom 1 and 2 connection. It also supplies the up tally and
program audio signals.
1 3 ) R E T C O N T R O L re tu rn vid e o c o n tro l c o n n e c to r 6 -p in )
Used for selecting the retur n video signal, 1, 2, 3 or 4 and for tur ning
the intercom microphone on or off from exter nal equipment such as
a selector unit on the camera pan bar.
1 4 ) S C R I P T sc rip t lig h t) c o n n e c to r 4 -p in )
Supplies power (12 V/ 5 W maximum) for the script light.
1 5 ) R E M O T E c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Inter face for an optional Master Set-up Unit or Remote Control
Unit/ Panel, via a CCA cable.
1 6 ) A c c e sso ry b ra c k e t
Used to attach an optional accessor y, such as a BKP-7911/ 7912
Script Holder or a lens focus/ zoom demand control. To attach an
accessor y, refer to the its instr uction manual.
1 7 ) A C O U T A C p o we r o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r
Supplies AC power (200 VA maximum).
1 8 ) C C U c a m e ra c o n tro l u n it) c o n n e c to r tria x c o n n e c to r
Inter face for the triax cable connecting the camera to the Camera
Control Unit. All the signals to and from a BVP-900 Series camera
and its CCU (power, control, video and audio) are car ried by this
single triax cable.
1 9 ) R E F I N re fe re n c e sig n a l in p u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
* 1
Accepts a VBS or black burst signal to genlock the camera when it is
operating in stand-alone mode.
2 0 ) VB S vid e o sig n a l o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
* 1
Supplies composite video signals when the BVP-900/ 900P is
2 1 ) VT R c o n n e c to r 2 6 -p in )
* 1
Connection for a VTR, via a CCZ or CCZQ cable, when the camera is
2 2 ) D C I N D C p o we r in p u t) c o n n e c to r 4 -p in )
* 1
Power connection for an exter nal DC power source (11.5 V to 18 V)
when using a BVP-900/ 900P as a stand-alone camera.
* 1 . T h e se c o n n e c to rs a re p a rt o f th e B K P -7 9 1 0 /7 9 1 0 P S ta n d -a lo n e K it.
59
R e a r P a n e l
The functions of the switches and controls numbered 1) through 30)
are the same for both the BVP-900 and BVP-900P. The switches and
controls numbered 31) through 36) are for the BVP-900, and those
numbered 37) through 42) are for the BVP-900P. For details of
switches and controls numbered 37) through 42) for the BVP-900P,
see Rear panel of the BVP-900P.
R e a r P a n e l o f th e B VP -9 0 0 /9 0 0 P
1
0
2 3 H-POSI
WIDTH
V-POSI
HEIGHT STORE
RETURN
SELECT
1
RET RET 1
1 2 3
CURSOR
FILTER LOCAL 4
5
A
CENTER
MARKER
SAFETY
ZONE
UP TALLY MIX VF DISPLAY
0
0
0
0
0
0
B C
POWER
R G B
D
E
1
2 3
4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON CALL
PinP
POSITION
OFF
ON
OFF
MENU SELECT
VF DETA
1
POWER indicator
28
FILTER LOCAL button
27
ND filter control
26
Spare switch
25
CC filter contorol
24
CENTER MARKER switch
23
SAFETY ZONE switch
22
UP TALLY switch
21
MIX VF switch
20
DISPLAY switch
29
VF connector
30
Memo clip
31
MIC ON/OFF Switch
32
INTERCOM PROD/ENG switch
31
MIC ON/OFF switch
33
INTERCOM 2 connector
36
PGM control
35
REVERSE switch
34
INTERCOM control
32
INTERCOM PROD/ENG Switch
33
INTERCOM 1 connector
34
INTERCOM control
35
REVERSE switch
36
PGM control
19
MENU SELECT switch
17
VF DETAIL switch
15
PinP switch
14
CALL button
12
CURSOR ON button
11
CURSOR STORE button
10
Rear tally lamp
9
RETURN SELECT knob
8
RET 1 button
7
RET button
6
HEIGHT control
5
WIDTH control
4
V-POSI control
3
H-POSI control
13
CURSOR 1, 2, and 3 buttons
16
VF DETAIL control
18
MENU SELECT knob
2
Video signal select buttons
1
INTERCOM 1 INTERCOM 2
ENG PROD
REVERSE
INTERCOM PGM
MIC
OFF ON ENG PROD
REVERSE
INTERCOM PGM
MIC
OFF ON
ENG PROD
REVERSE
INTERCOM PGM
MIC
OFF ON ENG PROD
REVERSE
INTERCOM PGM
MIC
OFF ON
0 0 0 0
60
10
1 ) P O WE R in d ic a to r
Illuminates as follows to show the power supply status.
Green: Power is supplied to the BVP-900/ 900P.
Red: The CAMERA POWER switch of the CCU-700A/ 700AP is
set to the off position, or the CAM PW button of the MSU-
700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series Remote Control
Panel unit is set to off.
Yellow: Power is supplied to the BVP-900/ 900P, however the VF
PW button of the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panel is set to off and power is not
supplied to the viewfinder.
Not illuminated: Power is not supplied to the camera.
2 ) Vid e o sig n a l se le c t b u tto n
Selects the video signals (R, G and B) displayed on the viewfinder.
The TEST OUT connector can output the same signals as those
displayed on the viewfinder.
* When an R, G or B button is pressed the cor responding signal is
displayed. When two buttons are pressed simultaneously, the
cor responding signals are mixed and then displayed.
* When all three R, G and B buttons are pressed at the same time,
a Y signal is displayed on the viewfinder.
* When none of the buttons are pressed, the following signals are
output::
When a black-and-white viewfinder is used: A Y signal is output to
the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector.
When a color viewfinder is used: The R, G and B signals are output
to the viewfinder, and a color picture appears on the viewfinder. The
TEST OUT connector outputs a Y signal.
3 ) H -P O S I h o rizo n ta l p o sitio n ) c o n tro l
Adjusts the horizontal position of the box cursor on the viewfinder
screen.
4 ) V-P O S I ve rtic a l p o sitio n ) c o n tro l
Adjusts the ver tical position of the box cursor on the viewfinder
screen.
5 ) WI D T H c o n tro l
Adjusts the width of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen within
the safety zone. See description of the SAFETY ZONE switch.
6 ) H E I G H T c o n tro l
Adjusts the height of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen within
the safety zone. See description of the SAFETY ZONE switch.
7 ) R E T 2 re tu rn vid e o ) b u tto n
Press this button when another retur n video source is used. The
retur n video signal selected by the RETURN SELECT knob is
displayed on the viewfinder. When the TEST OUT switch on the MS
board is set to VF, the TEST OUT connector also outputs the
selected retur n video signal. Press this button again and the camera
signal is output to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector.
8 ) R E T 1 re tu rn vid e o 1 ) b u tto n
* Press to monitor the retur n video 1 signal on the viewfinder.
When the TEST OUT switch on the MS board is set to VF, the
TEST OUT connector also outputs the retur n video 1 signal.
Press this button again and the camera signal is output to the
viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector.
* When using the BVP-900/ 900P as a stand-alone camera with a
VTR, the playback signal of the VTR is output.
N o te s
* The RET 1 button has priority over the RET button if both buttons are
pressed. (The TEST OUT switch setting has no effect on this priority.)
* When the TEST OUT switch is set to RET, the TEST OUT connector
outputs the retur n video signal, regardless of the setting of the video
signal select button.
9 ) R E T U R N S E L E C T k n o b
Selects the retur n video signal displayed on the viewfinder screen
when the RET button is depressed.
1 0 ) R e a r ta lly la m p
Lights when a red tally signal is received. When the CALL button on
an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or an RCP-700 Series Remote
Control Panel is pressed, the lamp is illuminated if not already lit or
tur ned off if it was already illuminated. The brightness of this tally
lamp is adjustable with a control on the inter nal AT board. Attach
one of the supplied number plates (0 through 9) to show the camera
number. For details on adjusting the brightness and attaching a
number plate, refer to the system manual.
1 1 ) C U R S O R S T O R E b u tto n
Press to store the size and position of the box cursor.
N o te If the CURSOR button is not illuminated, the data cannot be stored.
1 2 ) C U R S O R O N b u tto n
Press and illuminate this button to display the box cursor on the
viewfinder screen. Press this button again, the button illumination is
tur ned off and the box cursor disappears.
1 3 ) C U R S O R c u rso r m e m o ry) 1 , 2 a n d 3 b u tto n s
Press one of these buttons with the CURSOR STORE button
blinking, and the size and position of the box cursor displayed on the
viewfinder screen is stored. Three different box cursor settings can
be stored using these buttons. You can recall the stored size and
position of the box cursor by simply pressing the cor responding
button.
N o te Once any one of the three cursor buttons is illuminated, the H-POSI,
V-POSI, WIDTH and HEIGHT controls are disabled.
1 4 ) C A L L b u tto n
* Press to call the operator of a CCU-700A/ 700AP, MSU-700
Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel. The
call button of the RCP-700 Series panel and on the MSU-700 is
illuminated and a buzzer sounds. The camera CALL button is
illuminated when the CALL button on the RCP-700 Series panel
or the MSU-700 is pressed.
* When using the BVP-900/ 900P as a stand-alone camera, this
button functions as the star t/ stop button for the VTR.
1 5 ) P in P P ic tu re -in -P ic tu re ) switc h
Used to display a small picture in a cor ner of the main viewfinder
picture.
POSITION: The position of the sub image moves to a different
cor ner each time you move the switch from ON to
this position.
ON: Enters the P in P mode. When neither the RET 1 nor the
RET 2 button is depressed, the camera signal is displayed
as the main viewfinder image, while the last selected retur n
video signal is displayed as the sub image. Press either the
RET 1 or RET 2 button to exchange the pictures on the
viewfinder screen and the small picture.
OFF: The sub image does not appear.
N o te You can setup the monitoring of the small picture only when you push
the retur n button of the camera. For the details, refer to the system manual.
61
1 6 ) VF D E TA I L vie wfin d e r d e ta il c o n tro l
Adjusts the amount of detail in the viewfinder picture when the VF
DETAIL switch is set to ON. This has no effect on the camera output
signal.
N o te The viewfinder detail control function has no effect on a retur n video
signal and the Picture-in-Picture function.
1 7 ) VF D E TA I L vie wfin d e r d e ta il a d ju stm e n t) switc h
ON: Emphasizes the amount of detail in the viewfinder picture.
With the switch set to this position, you can adjust the
amount of detail using the VF DETAIL control.
OFF: Disables detail emphasis.
1 8 ) M E N U S E L E C T k n o b
Controls menu item selection and value setting on the viewfinder
screen. For menu operation, refer to the system manual.
1 9 ) M E N U S E L E C T switc h
ENTER: Activates the selection made by the MENU SELECT
knob.
CANCEL: Cancels the selection made by the MENU SELECT
knob and restores the previously selected menu item.
For menu operation, refer to the system manual.
2 0 ) D I S P L AY switc h
Used to display the status of the switch settings, automatic
adjustment items and results on the viewfinder screen.
ON: The display function is enabled.
OFF: The display function is disabled.
MENU: A menu for setting the displayed items and functions
appears.
2 1 ) M I X VF m ix vie wfin d e r switc h
Selects the picture in the viewfinder when the RET 1 or RET button
is pressed.
ON: When the RET 1 or RET button is depressed, a mixed
picture of the camera output signal and the retur n video
signal (retur n video 1 or the retur n video signal selected by
the RETURN SELECT control) is displayed on the
viewfinder screen. The mixing ratio is adjustable with the
control on the inter nal board of the CCU-700A/ 700AP. For
details, refer to the system manual.
OFF: Only the retur n video 1, or the retur n video signal selected
by the RETURN SELECT control, can be monitored when
the RET 1 or RET 2 button is pressed.
2 2 ) U P TA L LY switc h
Selects whether the exter nal tally lamp, up tally lamp or front tally
lamp on the viewfinder are illuminated when a red tally signal is
supplied to the camera system.
ON: The tally lamps illuminate.
OFF: The tally lamps do not illuminate.
The brightness of the up tally lamps on the BVP-900/ 900P and on the
viewfinder is adjustable. For details, refer to the system manual.
2 3 ) S A F E T Y Z O N E switc h
ON: A box (safety zone) indicating 90%of the picture area
appears on the viewfinder screen.
OFF: A safety zone box does not appear on the viewfinder
screen.
The size of the safety zone can be changed to 80%by a switch on the
BVP-900/ 900P. For details, refer to the system manual.
2 4 ) C E N T E R M A R K E R switc h
ON: A white cross (center marker) appears on the viewfinder
screen to indicate its center.
OFF: The center marker does not appear on the viewfinder
screen.
You can adjust the position of the center marker so that it matches
the center of the lens in use. This adjusted position can be stored in a
lens file. For details, refer to the system manual.
2 5 ) C C c o lo r te m p e ra tu re c o n ve rsio n ) filte r c o n tro l
Selects a filter suitable for the lighting conditions when the FILTER
LOCAL button is illuminated.
2 6 ) S p a re switc h
2 7 ) N D filte r c o n tro l
Selects the ND filter when the FILTER LOCAL button is illuminated.
2 8 ) F L I T E R L O C A L filte r lo c a l c o n tro l b u tto n
Press and illuminate this button to enable switching of the CC and
ND filters using the CC and ND filter controls. Press this button
again so that it is not illuminated to retur n filter control to the master
set-up unit or the remote control panel.
2 9 ) VF vie wfin d e r c o n n e c to r D -su b 2 5 -p in )
Inter face connector for the camera viewfinder.
3 0 ) M e m o c lip
R e a r P a n e l o f th e B VP -9 0 0 o n ly
3 1 ) M I C in te rc o m m ic ro p h o n e ) O N /O F F switc h
Tur ns the headset microphone on or off.
3 2 ) I N T E R C O M P R O D /E N G in te rc o m p ro d u c e r/e n g in e e r lin e )
switc h
Selects the destination of the intercom 1 or 2 signals between the
producer line and engineer line.
PROD: Goes to the producers line.
ENG: Goes to the engineers line.
3 3 ) I N T E R C O M 1 a n d I N T E R C O M 2 c o n n e c to rs XL R 5 -p in )
* Connect an XLR 5-pin-type headset. The INTERCOM 1
connector can be used for communication even if the power to
the camera is tur ned OFF on the CCU-700A/ 700AP. You can use
the INTERCOM 2 connector for an RTS intercom system by
installing an optional BKP-7913 RTS Intercom System Kit, and
two RTS Belt-pack can be connected.
* You can monitor playback audio from the VTRs when using the
BVP-900/ 900P as a stand-alone unit.
3 4 ) I N T E R C O M in te rc o m vo lu m e ) c o n tro l
Adjusts the output level of the intercom.
3 5 ) R E VE R S E switc h
Reverse the left and right channels of the intercom signals.
P o sitio n F ilte r
A Cross filter
B 3200 K (Clear)
C 4300 K
D 6300 K
E 8000 K
P o sitio n F ilte r
1 Clear
2 1/4 ND
3 1/8 ND
4 1/16 ND
5 1/64 ND
62
10
3 6 ) P G M p ro g ra m a u d io le ve l c o n tro l
* Adjusts the output level of the program audio.
* This control adjusts the level of the playback audio signal of the
VTR when the BVP-900/ 900P is used as a stand-alone camera.
R e a r P a n e l o f th e B VP -9 0 0 P
For details on the functions of the switches and controls numbered
1) through 30), see Rear panel of the BVP-900.
3 7 ) I N T E R C O M c o n n e c to r XL R 5 -p in )
* Connection for a headset with an XLR 5-pin connector. The left
INTERCOM connector can be used for communication even if
the power to the camera is tur ned OFF on the CCU-700P. You
can use the right INTERCOM connector for an RTS intercom
system by installing an optional BKP-7913 RTS Intercom System
Kit. Two RTS belt packs can be connected.
* Playback audio from a VTRs can be monitored via this connector
when using a BVP-900P as a stand-alone camera.
3 8 ) T R A C K E R c o n tro l
Adjusts the level of the intercom with the tracker.
3 9 ) E N G e n g in e e r lin e ) c o n tro l
Adjusts the level of the intercom with the engineer.
4 0 ) M I C m ic ro p h o n e lin e se le c t) switc h
Selects the line to which the headset microphone is connected.
ENG: connected to the engineers line.
OFF: microphone switched off.
PROD: connected to the producers line.
4 1 ) P R O D p ro d u c e r c o n tro l
Adjusts the intercom level of the producers line.
4 2 ) P G M p ro g ra m a u d io le ve l c o n tro l
* Adjusts the level of the program audio fed to the headset.
* This control adjusts the level of the playback audio from a VTR
when the BVP-900P is used as a stand-alone camera.
1
TRACKER ENG PROD PGM
MIC
37
INTERCOM connector
37
INTERCOM connector
38
TRACKER control
39
ENG control
40
MIC switch
41
PROD control
42
PGM control
63
Power HAD 1000
LOCK TEST OUT RET 1
MIC 1
REMOTE
12
INCOM button
13
RET 1 button
14
RET 2 button
15
VF connector
16
LOCK screw
17
RET 1 button
18
REMOTE connector
19
TEST OUT connector
20
Shoulder pad
IN
C
O
M
R
E
T
1
R
E
T
2
VTR
DISPLAY TESTOUT
GAIN OUTPUT WHITE
ON
OFF
MENU CANCEL
ENTER
L
M
H
OFF
AUTO
KNEE
1
FILTER LOCAL button
2
ND filter button
3
CC filter button
4
WHITE switch
5
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch
6
GAIN switch
7
VTR switch
8
ENTER/CANCEL switch
9
DISPLAY switch
10
TEST OUT switch
11
TALLY lamp and switch
(b) BVP-950/950P
S id e P a n e ls
1 ) F I LT E R L O C A L filte r lo c a l c o n tro l b u tto n
Pressing the CC or ND filter button while pressing this button
enables switching of the CC and ND filters.
2 ) N D filte r b u tto n
Used to select the desired ND filter when the FILTER LOCAL button
is pressed at the same time.
3 ) C C c o lo r te m p e ra tu re c o n ve rsio n ) filte r b u tto n
Used to select the appropriate CC filter for the lighting conditions
when the FILTER LOCAL button is pressed at the same time.
4 ) WH I T E wh ite b a la n c e m e m o ry se le c t) switc h
Selects the white balance adjustment method and memor y to store
the adjusted value.
F ilte r N o . F ilte r
1 Clear
2 1/4 ND
3 1/8 ND
4 1/16 ND
5 1/64 ND
Filter No. Filter
A Cross filter
B 3200 K (Clear)
C 4300 K
D 6300 K
E 8000 K
64
10
PRESET: White balance is automatically adjusted to the preset
value for the color temperature of 3200K.
A or B: Memor y A or B is selected.
5 ) O U T P U T /A U T O K N E E o u tp u t sig n a l se le c t/a u to k n e e ) switc h
Selects an output signal supplied to a VTR, viewfinder and video
monitor (color bar signals or camera picture). When the camera
picture is selected, the auto knee function can be activated.
BARS/ OFF: Color bar signals are output, and the auto-knee
circuit does not function.
CAM/ OFF: The camera picture is output, but the auto-knee
circuit does not function.
CAM/ ON: The camera picture is output, and the auto-knee
circuit functions.
6 ) G A I N switc h
Selects the appropriate video gain according to the illumination of the
shot. The values for positions low, medium and high are set with the
Set-up Menu on the viewfinder screen. For details, refer to the
system manual.
7 ) VT R switc h
Selects the control signal to a VTR connected to the camera via an
optional CA-553/ 553P Camera Adaptor. Depending on the switch
setting, the VTR star ts recording as follows:
SAVE: Power-save position. Recording star ts a few seconds after
the VTR START button is pressed. A new recording may
not smoothly join to the previous recording.
STBY (standby): Recording star ts immediately the VTR START
button is pressed.
N o te The WHITE 4), OUTPUT/ AUTO KNEE 5), GAIN 6) and VTR 7)
switches do not function when the camera is connected to a camera control
unit.
8 ) E N T E R /C A N C E L switc h
Functions when the DISPLAY switch is set to MENU (Menu mode).
ENTER: Activates the selection made by the MIC 1 LEVEL
control.
CANCEL: Cancels the selection made by the MIC 1 LEVEL
control and restores the previously selected menu
item.
9 ) D I S P L AY switc h
Used for displaying camera status such as switch settings, camera
and viewfinder configurations and the results of automatic
adjustments on the viewfinder screen.
ON: The camera display function is activated. The items shown
can be programmed using the menu.
OFF: The display function is not activated.
MENU: A screen for setting the displayed items and
programming camera set-up appears. The MIC 1
LEVEL control on the front panel functions as the menu
item selector.
1 0 ) T E S T O U T o u tp u t) se le c to r
Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector.
ENC: An encoded signal is output.
RGB: Either an R, G or B signal is output.
SEL: Each time you press down the selector switch from the
RGB position to the SEL position, the output signal from
the TEST OUT connector cyclically changes between R, G
and B.
1 1 ) TA L LY re a r ta lly) la m p a n d switc h
With the switch set to ON, when a red or green tally signal is
supplied, the lamp illuminates in the cor responding color. When the
CALL button on the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series
Remote Control Panel is pressed the lamp is illuminated if not
already lit or tur ned off if it was already illuminated. When a VTR is
connected to the camera using a camera adaptor, the lamp
illuminates in red when a record tally signal is supplied from the
VTR. To prevent the lamp illuminating even when a tally signal is
supplied, set the switch to OFF.
1 2 ) I N C O M in te rc o m ) b u tto n
The intercom 1 microphone is tur ned on while this button is pressed.
1 3 ) R E T 1 re tu rn vid e o 1 ) b u tto n
The retur n video 1 signal from the Camera Control Unit (CCU) is
displayed on the viewfinder screen while this button is pressed. It
has the same function as the other RET 1 button, see17).
When retur n video 2 is in use, press this button to display the retur n
video 2 signal on the viewfinder screen.
1 5 ) VF vie wfin d e r ) c o n n e c to r 2 0 -p in )
Connector for the 20-pin cable to the camera viewfinder. To use the
BVF-55/ 55CE Viewfinder, connect the cable supplied with the
viewfinder.
1 6 ) L O C K sc re w
Locks the attached camera adaptor.
The retur n video 1 signal from the Camera Control Unit (CCU) is
displayed on the viewfinder screen while this button is pressed. It
has the same function as the other RET 1 button, see 13).
Connector for an optional RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel or
RM-B150 Remote Control Unit, using a CCA cable. The camera can
be controlled from either one of these units. A video monitoring
signal is provided from the RM-B150, using the exclusive cable
supplied with this unit
1 9 ) T E S T O U T c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Supplies the signal selected with the TEST OUT selector.
2 0 ) S h o u ld e r p a d
A chest pad is provided. Pull out for use.
Chest pad
F ro n t P a n e l
1 ) M I C 1 m ic ro p h o n e c h a n n e l 1 ) c o n n e c to r
Accepts the signal from an exter nal microphone. Normally, this is
used to connect the microphone supplied with the optional BVF-
10/ 10CE, BVF-C10W or BVF-20W/ 20WCE Viewfinder.
2 ) M ic ro p h o n e p o we r switc h
Controls power fed to the microphone connected to the MIC-1
connector.
+48 V: When the microphone supplied with the optional BVF-
10/ 10CE, BVF-C10W or BVF-20W/ 20WCE Viewfinder is
connected. Also use with any other type of microphone
requiring an exter nal +48 V power source.
OFF: When the connected microphone does not require
exter nal power.
3 ) L e n s c o n n e c to r 1 2 -p in )
Connector for the lens remote control cable.
4 ) VT R S TA R T b u tto n
When a camera control unit is connected using an optional camera
adaptor, the intercom 1 audio signal is normally sent to the CCU
while this button remains pressed. However, this function can be
changed via the Set-up Menu displayed on the viewfinder screen.
This provides a choice of sending either the intercom 1 or the
intercom 2 audio signal, or the retur n video 2 signal to the CCU
while this button remains pressed. With a VTR connected using a
CA-553/ 553P Camera Adaptor, pressing this button alter nately star ts
and stops the VTR recording. This is the same function as that of the
VTR button on the lens. For details, refer to the system manual.
65
5 ) S H U T T E R switc h
OFF: The electronic shutter does not function.
ON: The electronic shutter is activated.
SEL: The shutter speed and shutter mode change each time the
switch is moved to this position.
For details, refer to the system manual.
6 ) A U T O W/B B A L a u to m a tic wh ite b a la n c e /b la c k b a la n c e
a d ju stm e n t) switc h
Automatically adjusts the white balance and black balance.
WHT: The white balance is automatically adjusted. When the
WHITE switch on the side of the camera is set to A or B,
the adjusted value is stored in memor y A or B.
BLK: The black balance is automatically adjusted. Black set is
simultaneously adjusted.
N o te The SHUTTER 5) and AUTO W/ B BAL 6) switches do not function
when the camera is connected to a camera control unit (CCU).
7 ) M I C 1 L E VE L m ic ro p h o n e 1 le ve l c o n tro l
When a VTR is connected using an optional camera adaptor, the
microphone 1 audio level is adjusted by tur ning this control. When
the CA-570/ 570P Camera Adaptor is used and the LEVEL/ MIC
switch on the of the camera adaptor rear panel is set to FRONT/ OFF,
the sound volume of the intercom is adjusted with this control. You
can also tur n the intercom 1 microphone on/ off by pressing this
control. When the DISPLAY switch on the side panel of the camera is
set to MENU, tur n this control to select a menu item and press it to
register the selection. For menu operations, refer to the system
manual.
MIC 1 connector
1
Microphone power switch
2
LENS connector
3
VTR START button
4
SHUTTER switch
5
AUTO W/B BAL switch
6
MIC 1 LEVEL control
7
66
10
(c) CA-570/570P
R e a r P a n e l a n d S id e P a n e ls
2
TALLY lamp and TALLY switch
1
RET1 button/RET button and RET 2/3/4 switch
3
PGM level controls
4
INCOM level controls, PROD/ENG
switches, and LEVEL/MIC switches
5
Triax connector
6
INCOM 1/2 connector
7
VTR connector
8
REMOTE connector
9
DC IN connector
12
TEST OUT connector
13
RET CONT connector
14
TRACKER connector
15
EARPHONE jack
19
PGM level control
20
ENG level control
22
PROD level control
23
TRACKER level control
24
LEVEL/MIC switch
21
MIC LINE
switch
16
CALL button
17
POWER switch and indicator
18
DC OUT connector
10
PROMPTER/GEN LOCK connector
11
AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2 connectors and LINE/MIC switch
and extemal power supply mode switch for the microphone
67
1 ) R E T 1 re tu rn vid e o 1 ) b u tto n /R E T re tu rn vid e o ) b u tto n a n d
R E T 2 /3 /4 switc h
R E T 1 re tu rn vid e o 1 ) b u tto n
Press this button to monitor the retur n video 1 signal from the
CCU in the viewfinder or on a monitor using the TEST OUT
signal.
R E T re tu rn vid e o ) b u tto n
Press this button to monitor the retur n video signal from the CCU
in the viewfinder. Select the signal to be monitored with the RET
2/ 3/ 4 switch.
R E T 2 /3 /4 switc h
Selects the retur n video signal monitored in the viewfinder while
the RET button is pressed.
2 ) TA L LY la m p a n d TA L LY switc h
When the TALLY switch is ON, the TALLY lamp illuminates when a
red tally signal or call signal is input from the CCU. Tur ning S200-1
on the AU-251 board to ON makes the batter y alarm signal flash the
TALLY lamp.
3 ) P G M p ro g ra m ) le ve l c o n tro ls C A -5 7 0 o n ly)
Adjusts the audio volume of the program.
4 ) I N C O M in te rc o m ) le ve l c o n tro ls, P R O D /E N G
p ro d u c e r/e n g in e e r switc h e s, a n d L E VE L /M I C in te rc o m
le ve l/m ic ro p h o n e ) switc h e s C A -5 7 0 o n ly. S e e 1 9 ) th ro u g h 2 4 ) fo r
C A -5 7 0 P )
I N C O M in te rc o m ) le ve l c o n tro ls
Adjusts the audio volume of the intercom
P R O D /E N G p ro d u c e r/e n g in e e r switc h e s
Switches the intercom microphone.
PROD: Selects the microphone to the producers line.
ENG: Selects the microphone to the engineers line.
L E VE L /M I C in te rc o m le ve l/m ic ro p h o n e ) switc h
The LEVEL and MIC switch settings control the following
functions:
REAR/ ON: Tur ns on the intercom microphone. The intercom
reception level is controlled from the rear panel
INCOM control.
REAR/ OFF: Tur ns off the intercom microphone. Tur n the
intercom microphone on and off using the control
on exter nal equipment (such as a pan bar control)
connected to the RET CONT connector. Adjust the
intercom reception level with the INCOM control.
FRONT/ OFF: Tur ns off the intercom microphone. Tur n the
on exter nal equipment (such as a pan bar control)
connected to the RET CONT connector. The
intercom reception level is controlled from the rear
panel INCOM control.
N o te INCOM level controls, LEVEL/ MIC switches and PROD/ ENG
switches are provided for both intercom1 and 2.
5 ) Tria x c o n n e c to r
Connector for a triax cable from a CCU-700A/ 700AP or CCU-
550/ 550P Series Camera Control Unit.
6 ) I N C O M in te rc o m ) 1 /2 c o n n e c to rs
Connectors for headphones enabling operators to listen to and speak
on intercom, and listen to program audio. Set the MIC switch on the
AU-237 board to CM when using headphones with a carbon
microphone or to DYN when using a dynamic microphone. The
INCOM 1 connector can be used for communications even when
power to the camera is tur ned off on the CCU.
7 ) VT R c o n n e c to r 2 6 -p in )
Inputs and outputs video signals, audio signals, control signals and
the power supply. Connects to the CAMERA connector on a VTR or
AC adaptor.
N o te The VTR connector cannot be used when a CCU is connected.
8 ) R E M O T E c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connects to an RCP-700 Series or RM-B150 Remote Control Unit.
The length of the connecting cable must not exceed 150 feet (50
meters).
N o te
* The REMOTE connector cannot be used when a CCU is connected.
* When connecting to a RM-B150, use the cable supplied with this unit.
9 ) E XT D C I N D C in p u t) c o n n e c to r 4 -p in )
Connector for an AC adaptor output or batter y case. DC power is
supplied to the CA-570/ 570P via this connector when the POWER
switch is set to EXT.
1 0 ) P R O M P T E R /G E N L O C K p ro m p te r sig n a l in p u t a n d
o u tp u t/e x te rn a l syn c sig n a l in p u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Input for an exter nal sync signal, or input/ output for a prompter
video signal. Select the appropriate function with the
PROMPTER/ GENLOCK switch on the inter nal MD-119 board. The
connector is factor y set for PROMPT.
1 1 ) A U D I O I N 1 /A U D I O I N 2 a u d io in p u t) c o n n e c to rs XL R 3 -p in )
a n d L I N E /M I C lin e in p u t/m ic ro p h o n e ) switc h
Inputs for exter nal audio signals. Set the LINE/ MIC switches
according to the level of the input signal. The following power supply
settings can be specified for the exter nal microphone:
: +12 V is supplied to the exter nal microphone (when the S800
switch on the AU-251 board is set to ON).
OFF: power is not supplied to the exter nal microphone.
+48 V: +48 V is supplied to the exter nal microphone (when the
S700 switch on the AU-251 board is set to ON).
N o te If you select the signal switch to and the S800 on the AU-251 board
to on alter natively, then +12 V is supplied to the +48 V microphone and may
cause a damage to the microphone itself.
1 2 ) T E S T O U T te st vid e o o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Outputs retur n video signals, playback video signals, VBS signal or
monitor output signals. Normally outputs retur n video signals when a
CCU is connected and playback video signals when a VTR is
connected.
N o te Select the output signal with switch S100 on the AU-251 board.
1 3 ) R E T C O N T re tu rn c o n tro l c o n n e c to r 6 -p in )
Input for the control signals that select the retur n video 1, 2 or 3, and
tur n the intercom microphone on and off.
1 4 ) T R A C K E R c o n n e c to r 1 0 -p in )
Use for communications with a tracker. Also provides intercom 1 and
2 communications. Outputs the up tally and program audio signals.
DC is available from this connector, maximum cur rent 500 mA.
1 5 ) E A R P H O N E ja c k m in i-ja c k )
Connector for an earphone to monitor audio from the VTR, intercom
or program audio. Select the audio source with the switch S1 on the
MB-783 board.
Use this button to call the CCU or Master Set-up Unit operator.
When this button is pressed, the red tally lamps in the viewfinder
10
68
and on the CCU and MSU are illuminated.
1 7 ) P O WE R switc h
Selects the power source.
CCU: Power is supplied from the CCU.
(Standby): Standby mode.
EXT: Power is supplied from the VTR or via the EXT DC IN
connector (see 9)).
1 8 ) D C O U T d ire c t c u rre n t o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r 4 -p in )
Outputs 10.5 V to 17 V DC up to a maximum of 500 mA. Connecting
equipment with a power consumption greater than this maximum
rating will activate the protection circuit, cutting off the cur rent.
1 9 ) P R O D /E N G p ro d u c e r/e n g in e e r in te rc o m le ve l c o n tro ls,
P R O D /E N G p ro d u c e r/e n g in e e r switc h e s, a n d L E VE L /M I C
in te rc o m le ve l/m ic ro p h o n e ) switc h C A -5 7 0 P o n ly. S e e 4 ) fo r
C A -5 7 0 )
P G M p ro g ra m ) le ve l c o n tro l
Adjusts the audio volume of the program line.
E N G e n g in e e r le ve l c o n tro l
Adjusts the audio volume of the engineers line.
M I C L I N E switc h
Selects the line to which the headset microphone is connected.
ENG: connected to the engineers line.
OFF: microphone switched off.
PROD: connected to the producers line.
P R O D p ro d u c e r le ve l c o n tro l
Adjusts the audio volume of the producer line.
T R A C K E R le ve l c o n tro l
Adjust the audio volume of the tracker line.
L E VE L /M I C in te rc o m le ve l/m ic ro p h o n e ) switc h
The LEVEL and MIC switch settings control the following
functions:
REAR/ ON: Tur ns on the intercom microphone. Adjust the
intercom reception level with the PGM, ENG, PROD
and TRACKER level controls.
REAR/ OFF: Tur ns off the intercom microphone. Tur n the
on the exter nal equipment connected to the RET
CONT connector. Adjust the intercom reception
level with the PGM, ENG, PROD and TRACKER
level controls.
FRONT/ OFF: Tur ns off the intercom microphone. Tur n the
on exter nal equipment (such as a pan bar box)
connected to the RET CONT connector. Use the
control on the camera to adjust the intercom
reception level.
69
I n te rn a l S witc h e s
1 ) P R O M P T E R /G E N L O C K p ro m p te r sig n a l in p u t a n d
o u tp u t/e x te rn a l syn c sig n a l in p u t) switc h M D -1 1 9 b o a rd )
Selects the PROMPTER/ GENLOCK connector function.
PROMPTER: Inputs and outputs a prompter signal (factor y
setting).
GENLOCK: Inputs an exter nal sync signal.
2 ) I N T E R C O M a n d G A I N switc h e s A U -2 3 7 b o a rd )
Set these switches to specify the type of microphone connected to
the INCOM 1 and INCOM 2 connectors and their respective levels.
I N T E R C O M 1 /2 switc h e s
CM: carbon microphone (factor y setting)
DYN: dynamic microphone
G A I N 1 /2 switc h e s
+: Raises the gain 6 dB above standard gain
0: Standard gain
-: Lowers the gain 6 dB below standard gain
3 ) S witc h S 1 M B -7 8 3 b o a rd )
Specifies the type of audio signal output from the EARPHONE jack.
* S1-1: Set to ON to output the program audio signal.
* S1-2: Set to ON to output the audio signal of intercom 1.
* S1-3: Set to ON to output the audio signal of intercom 2.
* S1-4: Set to ON to output the VTR playback audio signal.
All switches are factor y set to OFF, except S1-1.
4 ) S witc h S 4 D M -1 1 6 b o a rd )
Selects the direction of the prompter signal flow between the CCU
and CAM.
CCU CAM: The video signal from the CCU is output from the
PROMPTER/ GENLOCK connector.
CAM CCU: The signal input to the PROMPT/ GENLOCK
connector is output to the CCU.
N o te The setting of the CN4, CN5 and the CCU should be same as S4 on
the DM-116 board.
MD TF AU AU
INTERCOM
PROMPTER
GENLOCK
GAIN
INTERCOM
GAIN
CA-570/570P
Switch onthe MB-783 board
CA-570/570P
Unscrew the four screw
Unscrew the four screws.
1 PROMPTER/GENLOCK switch
2 INTERCOM and GAIN switches
3 Switch S1
FL4
RV4
RV2
PL3
PL1
LV1
CN2
LV7
FL2
RV1
TP3
LV4
LV3
PL5
RV1
CN3
CN4
CN3
1 2 3 4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E2 TP5
Switch on the DM-116 board
4 Switch S4
10
70
5 ) S 3 switc h A U -2 3 7 b o a rd )
Specifies whether the incom audio output from INCOM 2 connector
and the program audio are mixed or not.
IND: No mixing (factor y setting for CA-570).
MIX: MIX mode 2 (set by switch S5) (CA-570 only).
6 ) S witc h S 4 A U -2 3 7 b o a rd )
When this switch is set to ON, the program audio is mixed with the
intercom audio. The factor y setting is OFF. (CA-570 only)
7 ) S witc h S 2 , S 4 , a n d S 5 A U -2 3 7 b o a rd )
These switches assign the mixing of intercom and control signals
(CA-570 only).
For details, refer to the system manual.
8 ) S witc h S 8 0 0 A U -2 5 1 b o a rd )
Tur ns the power supply (12 V A/ B) to the exter nal microphone on
and off. Power is not supplied if the MIC power switch on the rear
panel is set to OFF or to +48 V. The factor y setting is OFF.
9 ) S witc h S 6 0 0 A U -2 5 1 b o a rd )
Specifies the audio input signal to be from the MIC 1 connector on
the camera or the AUDIO IN 1 connector on the CA-570/ 570P.
C: Input from the MIC 1 connector on the camera.
CA: Input from the AUDIO IN 1 connector on the CA-570/ 570P.
1 0 ) S witc h S 3 5 1 A U -2 5 1 b o a rd )
Set to ON to monitor the microphone input on a headset. The factor y
setting is OFF.
1 1 ) S witc h S 7 0 0 A U -2 5 1 b o a rd )
Tur ns the power supply (48 V) to the exter nal microphone on and
off.
1 2 ) S witc h S 2 0 0 A U -2 5 1 b o a rd )
* S200-1: When S200-1 is set to ON, the batter y alarm signals
operate the tally lamp. This switch is factor y set to
OFF. In this position, the indicator in the viewfinder
is unaffected
* S200-2: Remote Control Panel power save function,
controlling power to the remote connector. When
ON, power to the remote connector is tur ned off
when a CCU is connected. When set to OFF, power
is always supplied to the REMOTE connector.
1 3 ) S witc h S 1 0 0 A U -2 5 1 b o a rd )
Selects the signal output from the TEST OUT connector.
* S100-1: Disables automatic switching between the playback
video signal and the retur n video signal.
ON: Outputs the playback video signal.
OFF: Outputs the retur n video signal when a CCU is
attached; outputs the playback video signal when a
VTR is attached. The factor y setting is OFF.
* S100-2: Specifies output of the VBS signal from the camera
or the retur n/ playback video signal.
ON: Outputs the VBS signal from the camera.
OFF: Outputs the retur n or playback video signal. The
factor y setting is OFF.
* S100-3: Selects either a VBS video signal output or monitor
signal output.
ON: Outputs the monitor signal.
OFF: Outputs the VBS signal.
* S100-4: Selects whether the control signal from the RET
CONT connector is received or not.
ON: Outputs the retur n video signal only for an L (ground)
retur n control signal.
OFF: Outputs the retur n video signal only when a CCU is
connected.
The various combinations of switch S100 settings and their
cor responding video output signal are as follows:
RV111
RV112
RV411
RV201
RV302
TPS01 S203
S203
E301
E301
E401
S301
S1 E1
TP111
CN1
0082
0082
6 Switch S4
7 Switch S2, S4, S5
5 Switch S3
1 2 3 4
A
B
C
D
E
F
Switch on the AU-237 board
RV203
RV100
S200
S100
S800
CN1
1 2 3 4
A
B
C
D
E
F
Switch on the AU-251 board
S700
S361
S990
9 Switch S600
10 Switch S351 8 Switch S800
13 Switch S100
12 Switch S200
11 Switch S700
A100-1 A100-2 A100-3 A100-4 RET CONT Video output signal
OFF OFF Return video (when a
CCU is connected)
Playback video (when
a VTR is connected)
ON OFF Playback video
ON OFF OFF Monitor video
OFF ON OFF ON L Return video (when a
CCU is connected)
L Playback video (when
a VTR is connected)
H VBS video
OFF ON ON ON L Return video (when a
CCU is connected)
L Playback video (when
a VTR is connected)
71
(d) CCU-700A/700AP
F ro n t P a n e l
1 ) R e d ta lly la m p
This lamp is illuminated when the unit receives a red tally signal.
When the CALL button on the camera, MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit,
or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is pressed, the lamp is
illuminated if it was not lit, or is tur ned off if it was already
illuminated. Attach one of the supplied number plates here. For
details on attaching a number plate, refer to the system manual.
2 ) G re e n ta lly la m p
Lights when the unit receives a green tally signal. Attach one of the
supplied number plates here. For details on attaching a number
plate, refer to the system manual.
3 ) M I C m ic ro p h o n e se le c t) switc h
Set to the appropriate position according to the type of headset
microphone.
DYNAMIC: When using a dynamic microphone.
OFF: Switches the microphone off.
CARBON: When using a carbon microphone.
4 ) I N T E R C O M in te rc o m vo lu m e ) c o n tro l
Adjusts the receiving level of the intercom. The volume of the sound
mixed with program audio is set with the control on the AT board.
For details on setting mixed-sound volume, refer to the system
manual.
The intercom line can be switched with the cor responding switch on
the inter nal AT board. For details, refer to the system manual.
5 ) I N T E R C O M c o n n e c to r XL R 5 -p in )
Connector for a headset. When you wish to use a headset with a plug
other than XLR 5-pin type, consult an authorized Sony representative.
6 ) C A M E R A P O WE R switc h a n d in d ic a to r
This switch controls the power supply to the camera when the MAIN
POWER switch is set to the ON position (| position). The indicator
illuminates when power is supplied to the camera. If an RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panel or MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit is
connected to this unit, the CAM PW switch on the RCP or MSU
panel must be illuminated to enable this switch to control the camera
power supply.
7 ) M A I N P O WE R switc h a n d in d ic a to r
This switches the power supply on and off to the entire camera
system including this unit, the camera and an RCP-700 Series
Remote Control Panel connected to the REMOTE connector. The
indicator illuminates when power is supplied to the system. Power is
not supplied to an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit.
8 ) C A B L E A L A R M in d ic a to r
SHORT: Illuminated when there is excessive cur rent in the
triax cable or when there is a shor t-circuit in the unit.
OPEN: Illuminated when a triax cable is not connected to the
CAMERA connector on the rear panel, or when the load
cur rent is extremely low even if a camera cable is
connected.
2
Green tally lamp 3
MIC switch
4
INTERCOM control
1
Red tally lamp
8
CABLE ALARM indicator
7
MAIN POWER switch and
indicator
5
INTERCOM connector
6
CAMERA POWER switch and indicator
CABLE
ALARM
MAIN
POWER
CAMERA
MIC
INTERCOM
POWER
CANERA CONTROL UNIT
10
72
R e a r P a n e l
1 ) C A M E R A c o n n e c to r tria x c o n n e c to r
Connection for a BVP-900 Camera using a triax cable. All of the
signals to and from the camera, including power, control, video and
audio are car ried via a single triax cable. Alter native camera
connector blocks are available to accommodate the various types of
triax connector in use.
2 ) M I C O U T P U T m ic ro p h o n e o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs XL R 3 -p in )
Output the microphone signals from the camera.
3 ) R E T 1 th ro u g h R E T 4 re tu rn vid e o 1 th ro u g h 4 in p u t)
c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Accept the retur n video signals from four different systems.
N o te : When an optional BKP-7312 SDI input board is installed, the RET 1
and 2 connectors in the ANALOG INPUT block are disabled.
4 ) R E F E R E N C E re fe re n c e sig n a l in p u t) lo o p c o n n e c to rs B N C
typ e )
Accept a reference signal, such as a black burst, for exter nal
synchronization.
5 ) P R O M P T E R p ro m p te r sig n a l in p u t) lo o p c o n n e c to rs B N C
typ e )
Accept the signal from a teleprompter.
6 ) R , G a n d B R , G a n d B sig n a l o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Provide a set of R, G and B signals for a chroma keyer.
7 ) Y, R -Y a n d B -Y c o m p o n e n t vid e o sig n a l o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs
B N C typ e )
Provide a set of Y, R-Y and B-Y signals for a digital component VTR
or a video switcher.
8 ) C H A R A C T E R c h a ra c te r sig n a l o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Supplies self-diagnostic results from this unit as a video signal.
9 ) WF 1 a n d WF 2 wa ve fo rm m o n ito r 1 a n d 2 o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs
B N C typ e )
Supply the video signals for a waveform monitor. The MONITOR
SELECT buttons on an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel select
the signal output from the WF 1 connector, and the WAVEFORM
MONITOR buttons on an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit select the
signal output from the WF 2 connector.
1 0 ) P I X1 a n d P I X2 p ic tu re m o n ito r 1 a n d 2 o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs
B N C typ e )
Supply video signals for picture monitors. The MONITOR SELECT
buttons on an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel select the signal
output from the PIX 1 connector, and the PICTURE MONITOR
buttons on the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit select the signal output
from the PIX 2 connector.
1 1 ) VB S 1 , VB S 2 a n d VB S 3 c o m p o site vid e o sig n a l 1 , 2 a n d 3
o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Supply composite video signals (VBS) from the camera.
1 2 ) S YN C syn c sig n a l o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Supplies the sync signals (0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms) generated by the built-
in sync generator. Connect to the sync input connector of a waveform
or picture monitor.
1 3 ) ~ A C I N A C p o we r in p u t) c o n n e c to r
Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord.
The power cord can be fixed to the CCU-700A/ 700AP using the
supplied plug holder.
1 4 ) WF M O D E wa ve fo rm m o n ito r m o d e ) c o n n e c to r 4 -p in )
Connect to the cor responding connector of a waveform monitor to
monitor signals in sequential mode. A sequential control signal is
output from this connector when you press the SEQ button on an
RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel, providing simultaneous
monitoring of the R, G and B signals.
2
MIC OUTPUT connectors
1
CAMERA connector
4
REFERENCE connectors
3
RET1 through RET4 connectors
5
PROMPTER connectors
ANALOG INPUT block
24
MIC REMOTE connector
23
INTERCOM REMOTE connector
22
RTS connectors
21
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector
20
COAX connector
19
Spare connectors
13
AC IN connector
14
WF MODE connector
15
RCP/CNU REMOTE connector
16
AUX REMOTE connector
17
SERIAL OUTPUT 1, 2, and 3 connectors
18
SERIAL INPUT RET 1 and RET 2 connectors
DIGITAL VIDEO block
6
R, G, and B connectors
ANALOG OUTPUT block
7
Y, R-Y, and B-Y connectors
8
CHARACTER connector
9
WF1 and WF2 connectors
10
PIX1 and PIX2 connectors
11
VBS1, VBS2, and VBS3 connectors
12
SYNC connector
INPUT
COAX
MIC
CH-1 CH-2
RET1 R
G
B
WF1
PIX1
WF2
VBS1
VBS2
VBS3
Y
R-Y
PIX2 SYNC
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
AUX
RET1 RET2
SERIAL INPUT SERIAL OUTPUT
1 2 3
CHARACTER
B-Y
REFERENCE
RET2
RET3
RET4
INTERCOM
REMOTE
CAMERA
HIS
MIC OUTPUT
OUTPUT
25
Voltage selector
CCU-700AP
220.240V 110.120V
~
AC IN
73
1 5 ) R C P /C N U R E M O T E re m o te c o n tro l p a n e l/c a m e ra c o m m a n d
n e two rk u n it /re m o te c o n tro l c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connect an MSU-700, CNU-700, CNU-500 or RCP-700 Series Remote
Control Panel using a CCA-5 cable. Control signals are then
accepted. When an RCP-700 Series panel is connected, power is also
supplied to the unit.
1 6 ) A U X a u x ilia ry) R E M O T E c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connection for an exter nal system. For details on connections, refer
to an authorized Sony representative.
1 7 ) S E R I A L O U T P U T 1 , 2 a n d 3 se ria l d ig ita l vid e o sig n a l 1 , 2
a n d 3 o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Camera output serial digital video signals are available from these
connectors when an optional BKP-7311 SDI output board is installed
in the CCU. The outputs from these connectors provide signals to a
digital video switcher, component digital VTR, etc.
1 8 ) S E R I A L I N P U T R E T 1 A N D R E T 2 se ria l d ig ita l vid e o sig n a l 1
a n d 2 o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
These connectors accept 10-bit, 4:2:2 component serial digital video
signals as retur n video 1 and 2 signals. They function when an
optional BKP-7312 SDI input board is installed in the CCU. When
this BKP-7312 is installed, the RET 1 and RET 2 connectors in the
ANALOG INPUT block are disabled.
1 9 ) S p a re c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
2 0 ) C O A X c o a x ia l c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Accepts and supplies the signals normally car ried by a triax cable,
except for power, by setting a switch on the inter nal DM board. For
connection, use a coaxial cable. When a retur n video function is
used, the maximum cable length of a 5C-2V (RG-6A/ U) coaxial cable
is 800 m (2,624 feet). With the optional long distance board installed,
the maximum cable length is increased to 1,000 m (3,280 feet).
2 1 ) I N T E R C O M /TA L LY/P G M p ro g ra m a u d io ) c o n n e c to r 1 9 -p in )
Supplies and accepts intercom, tally and program audio signals.
Connect to the cor responding connector on the intercom system.
2 2 ) R T S R T S in te rc o m ) c o n n e c to rs XL R 3 -p in )
Connection for an RTS intercom system.
2 3 ) I N T E R C O M R E M O T E c o n n e c to r D -su b 2 5 -p in )
Connection for an exter nal controller to control intercom muting,
producer line inter r uption and engineer line inter r uption. This
connector outputs the red tally, green tally, call signals and camera
number.
2 4 ) M I C R E M O T E m ic ro p h o n e re m o te c o n tro l c o n n e c to r D -su b
1 5 -p in )
Connection for an exter nal control unit, from which the microphone
input levels of the camera can be set to -60, -50, -40, -30 or -20 dB. You
can also set these microphone input levels with the switch on the
inter nal board of the CCU. This connector outputs the red tally and
green tally signals. For details on setting the microphone input levels
with the inter nal switch, refer to the system manual.
2 5 ) Vo lta g e se le c to r C C U -7 0 0 A P o n ly)
The operating voltage of the CCU-700AP is factor y set to 220 to 240
V AC. If the voltage of your local power line is different, contact Sony
ser vice personnel to change the voltage selector setting.
10
74
(e) CCU-550/550P
F ro n t P a n e l
1 ) C a m e ra n u m b e r sh e e t/ta lly in d ic a to r
Lights red when the red tally signal is input (e.g. when the video
signal from the camera connected to the CCU-550/ 550P goes on air).
When the CALL button on the camera, an MSU-700, RCP-700 Series
Remote Control panel or an optional BKP-5973 (CCU-550/ 550P Front
Panel) is pressed, the lamp is illuminated if it was not lit, or is tur ned
off if it was already illuminated. The indicator illuminates green when
the green tally signal is input (e.g. when the video signal from the
camera connected to the CCU-550/ 550P goes off air). Attach the
supplied number sheet here to indicate the camera number.
2 ) P O WE R switc h /C A M c a m e ra ) a n d M A I N in d ic a to rs
This POWER switch tur ns the power supply on and off to the entire
camera system, including the CCU-550/ 550P, the camera and the
remote control unit connected to the REMOTE connector of the
CCU. The MAIN and CAM indicators illuminate when the POWER
switch is tur ned on. The CAM indicator goes out when the power is
tur ned off by the CAM PW button on the remote control panel or the
master set-up unit, or by the CAM POWER switch on the inter nal AT
board.
3 ) C A B L E A L A R M in d ic a to rs
OPEN: illuminates when a triax cable is not connected to the
CAMERA connector on the rear panel of the CCU-
550/ 550P, or when the load cur rent is extremely low
even when a camera cable is connected.
SHORT: illuminates when there is excessive cur rent flow in the
triax cable.
4 ) I N C O M in te rc o m ) in p u t/o u tp u t/se ttin g se c tio n
INCOM (intercom) connector (XLR 5-pin): Headset connector for a
headset. When you wish to use with a plug other than an XLR 5-pin
type, consult an authorized Sony representative.
NCOM
SHORT
OPEN
MIC ON PROD
OFF
PGM PGM
PREV
-
MAIN
CAM
POWER CABLE
ALARM
1 Camera number sheet/tally indicator
2 POWER switch/CAM and MAIN indicators CABLE ALARM indicators
3
INCOM input/output/setting section
4
INCOM level control: Adjusts the input level of the intercom.
MIC/ PGM (program audio) switch:
ON: The headset microphone is switched on.
OFF: The headset microphone is switched off.
PGM: Program audio is output. When this position is
selected, the INCOM level control adjusts the output
level of the program audio.
INCOM selector: Selects the routing of intercom signals
output/ input through the
INCOM/ TALLY/ PGM connector.
PROD: Selects the producer line.
PRIV: The producer line and engineer line are disabled and
communication is restricted to that between the CCU-
550/ 550P and the camera connected to its rear panel.
ENG: Selects the engineer line.
connectors (BNC type): Output component signals or
RGB signals for a chroma keyer. Use the switch on the
inter nal VA board to select the type of signals to be
output. For details on the inter nal board, refer to the
system manual.
VBS/ 1/ 2/ 3 (composite video signal 1/ 2/ 3 output
connectors (BNC type): Ouput the signal from the
camera in composite format. Use the switch on the
inter nal VA board to select the composite video signal or
sync signal output from the VBS 3 connector. When the
sync signal (0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms) is selected, connect the
VBS 3 connector to the sync input of a waveform or
picture monitor.
WF (waveform monitor output) connector (BNC type):
Supplies a video signal to a waveform monitor. The
WAVEFORM MONITOR button on a MSU-700 Master
Set-up Unit, the MONITOR SELECT button on the RCP-
740/ 741 Remote Control Panel or the MONITOR
SELECT control on the BKP-5973 (optional CCU-
550/ 550P Front Panel) selects the signal output from the
WF connector. Changing the signal output from the WF
connector on the RCP-740/ 741 or the BKP-5973
simultaneously changes the picture on the picture
monitor.
75
R e a r P a n e l
1 ) C A M E R A c o n n e c to r tria x c o n n e c to r
Connector for the triax cable to the CA-550/ 550P Camera Adaptor
attached to the BVP-950/ 550 Camera.
2 ) M I C m ic ro p h o n e ) O U T P U T c o n n e c to rs XL R 3 -p in )
Outputs the microphone signals from the camera.
3 ) I N P U T c o n n e c to rs
REFERENCE INPUT loop connectors (BNC type): Accepts
a reference signal (black burst signal) for exter nal
synchronization.
RET1/ RET2 (return video signal 1/ 2) loop connectors
(BNC type): Accepts a retur n video signal from two
different sources. To select RET 1, press the RET button
on the camera lens; to select RET 2, press the VTR
button on the camera lens.
PROMPTER/ RET3 (return video signal 3) loop
connectors (BNC type): Accepts a teleprompter signal
or a retur n video signal. Use the switch on the inter nal
DM board to select PROMPTER or RET 3. You can also
select RET 3 by simultaneously pressing the RET and
VTR buttons on the camera lens or using exter nal
controls (such as a pan bar box). For details on the
inter nal boards, refer to the system manual.
4 ) O U T P U T c o n n e c to rs
Y/ G, R-Y/ R, B-Y/ B (component video signal output/ RGB)
1
CAMERA connector
2
MIC OUTPUT connectors
3
INPUT connectors
4
OUTPUT connectors SERIAL OUTOPUT connectors
5
AC IN connector
10
RCP/CNU REMOTE connector
8
COAX connector
9
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector
7
MIC REMOTE connector
6
CAMERA
INPUT OUTPUT SERIAL OUTPUT
REFERENCE
RET1
RET2
MIC OUTPUT
MIC REMOTE INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM REMOTE
COAX
WF MODE B-Y/B
R-Y/R WF
Y/G
VBS2
VBS3 VBS1
PIX PROMPTER/RET3
CH-1 CH-2
RCP/CHU
10
76
WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (4-pin):
Connects to the cor responding connector on a waveform
monitor to allow the sequential monitoring of signals.
PIX (picture monitor output) connector (BNC type):
Supplies a video signal, or video with character signals,
to a picture monitor. Use the PICTURE MONITOR
button on the MSU-700, the MONITOR SELECT button
on the RCP-740/ 741 or the MONITOR SELECT control
on the BKP-5973 (optional CCU-550/ 550P Front Panel)
to select the signal output from the PIX connector. When
the signal output from the PIX connector on the RCP-
740/ 741 or the BKP-5973 is changed, the waveform on
the waveform monitor also changes.
5 ) S E R I A L O U T P U T se ria l d ig ita l vid e o /a u d io o u tp u t) c o n n e c to rs
B N C typ e )
Supply the video/ microphone signals from the camera in serial
digital format. These connectors are active only when the optional
BKP-5972 SDI Output Board is attached to the CCU-550/ 550P.
Connect to a digital video switcher or component digital VTR.
6 ) M I C R E M O T E m ic ro p h o n e re m o te c o n tro l c o n n e c to r D -su b ,
1 5 -p in )
Connection for an exter nal control unit, from which the microphone
input levels of the camera can be set to -60, -50, -40, -30 or -20 dB. You
can also set these microphone input levels with the switch on the
inter nal AT board of the CCU. For details on setting the microphone
input levels with the inter nal switch, refer to the system manual.
7 ) I N T E R C O M /TA L LY/P G M p ro g ra m a u d io ) c o n n e c to r D -su b ,
2 5 -p in )
Inputs/ outputs intercom, tally and program audio signals. Connects
to an intercom, tally or program audio connector of an intercom
system.
8 ) R C P /C N U R E M O T E re m o te c o n tro l p a n e l/c a m e ra c o m m a n d
n e two rk re m o te ) c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connects to an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit, CNU-700/ CNU-500
Camera Command Network Unit or an RCP-700 Series Remote
Control Panel with an optional CCA-5 connecting cable to
transmit/ receive control signals. When the remote control panel is
connected, it is powered through this connector.
9 ) C O A X c o a x ia l c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Accepts and supplies signals from/ to the camera according to the
setting of a switch on the inter nal DM board. Power is not supplied
to the camera through this connector. Connect a coaxial cable from a
camera to this connector.
1 0 ) A C I N A C p o we r in p u t) c o n n e c to r
Connects to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord.
Secure the power cord to the CCU-550/ 550P using the supplied plug
holder.
I n te rn a l p o we r switc h a n d in te rn a l b o a rd s
1 ) I n te rn a l p o we r switc h
When an abnormality has occur red and power cannot be cut off by
pressing the POWER switch on the front panel, open the front panel
and tur n off this power switch.
2 ) I n te rn a l b o a rd s
Refer to the system manual.
S e lf-D ia g n o stic s
When an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is connected to the
CCU-550/ 550P, this control panel can initiate the display of the
NCOM
SHORT
OPEN
MIC ON PROD
OFF
PGM PGM
PREV
-
MAIN
CAM
POWER CABLE
ALARM
AD
AT
VA
AU
DM
Internal boards
Internal power switch
2
1
results of self-diagnostics of the CCU inter nal boards.
S e lf-d ia g n o stic s o f th e c a m e ra syste m
The results of self-diagnostics of the camera system are displayed on
three pages superimposed on the CCU monitoring output.. To
display the results, press the CHARACTER button on the RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panel. Press the CHARACTER button again to
display successive pages.
77
P a g e 1
TRIAX Cable: Triax cable connection status
(connected/ disconnected).
TRIAX Comp: Cable compensation of the triax cable
(automatic/ manual).
TRIAX Step: Triax cable length.
Timer: Elapsed time on the CCU-550/ 550P inter nal AT board.
For details on the inter nal boards, refer to the system manual.
P a g e 2
CAMERA Cable: Camera cable connection status
CAMERA Data: Camera data transmission status.
CAMERA Power: Power supply status of the camera.
CAMERA Tone: Camera ID tone status.
RCP/ CNU Cable: Connection status of RCP/ CNU connector
RCP/ CNU Data: Data transmission status of the RCP/ CNU
connector.
RCP/ CNU Power: Power supply status of the RCP/ CNU
connector.
PANEL Data: Data transmission status of the BKP-5973.
P a g e 3
Intercom CAMERA CH1: Status of intercom 1
(producer/ engineer).
Intercom CAMERA CH1 MIC: Microphone status of intercom
1 (on/ off).
*System Diag 3/3*
Intercom
CAMERA CH1 PROD
MIC OFF
CAMERA MIC Gain
Cont. Local
CH1 60dB
CH2 40dB
*System Diag 2/3*
CAMERA Cable Connect
Data OK
Power ON
Tone OK
RCP/CNU Cable Connect
Data OK
Power Ok
PANEL Data OK
*System Diag 1/3*
TRIAX Cable Connect
Comp. Auto
Step 2
Timer OH
CAMERA MIC Gain: Gain and control status of the
microphone circuit
R e su lts o f se lf-d ia g n o stic s o f th e C C U -5 5 0 /5 5 0 P in te rn a l b o a rd s
The results of the self-diagnostics of the CCU-550/ 550P inter nal
boards are displayed on five pages. To display the results, press the
CHARACTER button on the RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel
while page 3 of the self-diagnostics of the camera system is
displayed. Press the CHARACTER button again to display successive
pages.
D M b o a rd
CAMERA Video: Status of the Y, R-Y and B-Y signals of the
triax signal.
Prompter: Prompter status.
PRMPT/ RET3: Selection of cable compensation for the triax
cable (automatic/ manual).
TRIAX Comp: Selection of cable compensation for the triax
cable (automatic/ manual).
TRIAX Step: Length of the triax cable.
Return Video: Retur n video signal input status.
For details on the inter nal DM board, refer to the system manual.
AT b o a rd
Command CAMERA: Connection of commands to the
CAMERA connector.
Command RCP/ CNU: Connection of commands to the
RCP/ CNU connector.
CAMERA Tone: Check of the ID tone from the camera.
CAMERA Power: Power supply status of the camera.
CCU Paint Data: On/ off of analog control preset on the AT
board of the CCU-550/ 550P.
MIC Gain: Gain and control status of the microphone circuit of
the camera
For details on the inter nal AT board, refer to the system manual.
*AT Diag*
Command CAMERA OK
RCP/CNU OK
CAMERA Tone OK
CAMERA Power OK
CCU Paint Data Clear
MIC Gain
Cont. Local
CH1 60dB
CH2 40dB
*DM Diag*
CAMERA Video Y OK
R-Y OK
B-Y OK
Prompter NO Video
PRMPT/RET3 RET3
TRIAX Comp. Auto
Step 2
Retern Video OK

10
VA b o a rd
Video out: Video signal output status of each video output
connector.
CAMERA Phase: Locking status of the H-phase between the
camera and the CCU-550/ 550P.
Reference Phase: Locking status of the CCU-550/ 550P with the
input reference signal.
For details on the inter nal VA board, refer to the system manual.
A U b o a rd
Audio RF: Status of the audio RF signal output from the inter nal
AU board to the triax cable
For details on the inter nal AU board, refer to the system manual
A D b o a rd
Video PLL: Locking status of the video serial clock with the
video parallel clock
Audio PLL: Locking status of the audio clock with the video
parallel clock
Power: Power supply status of the AD board
For details on the AD board, refer to the system manual.
*AD Diag*
Video PLL OK
Audio PLL OK
Power OK
*AU Diag*
Audio RF OK
*VA Diag*
Video Out VBS1/2 OK
VBS3 OK
Y OK
PIX OK
WF OK
CAMERA Phase Lock
Reference Phase Unlock
78
79
(f) CNU-700
1 ) P O WE R switc h a n d in d ic a to r
Press to tur n the power ON or OFF. The indicator illuminates when
power is switched on.
2 ) C C U c a m e ra c o n tro l u n it) 1 th ro u g h 6 c o n n e c to rs 8 -p in )
Connect to the RCP/ CNU REMOTE connector on a CCU-
700A/ 700AP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5 cable.
3 ) R C P re m o te c o n tro l p a n e l 1 th ro u g h 6 c o n n e c to rs 8 -p in )
Connect to the CCU/ CNU REMOTE connectors on an RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panel using a CCA-5 cable.
4 ) M S U M a ste r S e t-u p U n it) c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connect to the CCU/ CNU REMOTE connector on an MSU-700
Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable.
5 ) VC S vid e o se le c to r c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700 Video Selector
using a CCA-5 cable.
6 ) A U X1 a n d A U X2 a u x ilia ry 1 a n d 2 ) c o n n e c to rs 8 -p in )
Connect to the AUX1 or AUX2 connector of another CNU-700 using a
CCA-5 cable when controlling multiple cameras with two or more
CNU-700 units. You can connect up to eight CNU-700 units.
7 ) C H A R A C T E R 1 a n d 2 c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Supply character data as a 525 or 625-line, black-and-white video
signal. The signal output is automatically selected according to the
reference signal input to the REFERENCE connector. If no reference
signal is input, the CNU-700 for the USA and Canada supplies a 525-
line video signal, the CNU-700 for other countries supplies a 625-line
POWER
CAMERACOMMAND NETWORK UNIT
1
Front panel
3
RCP 1 through 6 connectors
2
CCU 1 through 6 connectors
Rear panel
4
MSU connector
5
VCS connector
6
AUX1 and AUX2 connectors
11
Optional board insertion
section
10
~AC IN connector
9
RS-232C 1 through 3 connectors
8
7
CHARACTER 1 and 2 connectors
7 8 9 10 11 12
CCU
1 2 3 4 5 6
RCP
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
CCU
MSU VCS AUX1 AUX2
AUX4
~AC IN
MSC VCS AUX3
video signal. You can select whether to add a sync signal to the
output signal with switch S7 (SYNC ON/ OFF) on the AT board.
Refer to the system manual for details on the board switch settings.
8 ) R E F E R E N C E re fe re n c e sig n a l in p u t) lo o p c o n n e c to rs B N C
typ e )
Accepts a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal output from the
CHARACTER connector is synchronized with the input signal.
9 ) R S -2 3 2 C 1 th ro u g h 3 c o n n e c to rs D -su b 9 -p in )
Used for RS-232C inter faces. The function of these connectors
depends on whether or not an optional BKP-7930 System Expansion
Board is installed in the CNU-700 as shown below.
The power cord can be fixed to the CNU-700 using the supplied plug
holder.
1 1 ) O p tio n a l b o a rd in se rtio n se c tio n
Usedfor attaching the connector panel of an optional BKP-7930/ 7933.
When you attach the BKP-7930 to the CNU-700, up to 12 cameras
and remote control panels can be controlled. BKP-7933 enables the
S-bus functionality.
Connector No. No BKP-7930 installed With BKP-7930 installed
1 Reserved for ISR system
2 Reserved for RS-232C interface
3 Not used Reserved for RS-232C system
10
80
(g) CNU-500
F ro n t a n d R e a r P a n e l
Press to tur n the power ON or OFF. The indicator illuminates when
power is switched on.
2 ) C N U n u m b e r in d ic a to r
Attach the number plate.
3 ) C C U c a m e ra c o n tro l u n it) 1 th ro u g h 6 c o n n e c to rs 8 -p in )
Connect to the RCP/ CNU/ REMOTE connector of a CCU-
700A/ 700AP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5 cable.
4 ) M S U M a ste r S e t-u p U n it) c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connect to the CCU/ CNU REMOTE connector on an MSU-700
Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable.
5 ) C H A R A C T E R c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Supplies character data as a 525 or 625-line, black-and-white video
signal. The signal output is automatically selected according to the
reference signal input to the REFERENCE connector. If no signal is
input to the REFERENCE connector, the CNU-500 for the USA and
Canada supplies a 525-line video signal, and the CNU-500 for other
countries supplies a 625-line video signal.
6 ) R S -2 3 2 C c o n n e c to r D -su b 9 -p in )
Used for the RS-232C inter face. This connector is reser ved for the
ISR system.
7 ) ~ A C I N A C p o we r in p u t) c o n n e c to r
The power cord can be fixed to the CNU-500 using the supplied plug
holder.
8 ) R E F E R E N C E re fe re n c e sig n a l in p u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Accept a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal output from the
CHARACTER connector is synchronized with the input signal.
9 ) A U X a u x ilia ry) c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Not used.
1 0 ) VC S vid e o se le c to r c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700 Video Selector
using a CCA-5 cable.
1 1 ) R C P re m o te c o n tro l p a n e l 1 th ro u g h 6 c o n n e c to rs 8 -p in )
Connect to the CNU/ CCU REMOTE connector on RCP-700 Series
Remote Control PanelS using a CCA-5 cable.
~AC IN
POWER
1
4
3
11
10
9
2
CNU number indicator
Front panel
Rear panel
RCP 1 through 6 connectors
VCS connector
AUX connctor
MSU connector
CCU 1 through 6 connectors
CCU1 CCU2 CCU3 CCU4 CCU5 CCU6 MSU CHARACTER RS232C
5
6
7
8
CHARACTER connector
RS-232C connector
~AC IN connector
CAMERA COMMAND NETWORK UNIT
I n te rn a l B o a rd
3
MODE switch
4
UP/DOWN switch
5
SET/CANCEL switch
6
SYNC ON/OFF switch
7
CHARACTER PHASE
control
1
+5 V indicator
2
OPERATION switch
SYNC CHARACTER
UP DOWN SET CANCEL
MODE
PHUSE OFF ON
OPERATION
NORMAL EMERGENCY +5
5 ) S E T /C A N C E L switc h
Selects the displayed item or camera (CAM) when display page 9, 10
or 11 appears on the monitor screen.
6 ) S YN C O N /O F F switc h
Selects whether the sync signal is to be added to the video signal
output from the CHARACTER connector. At the factor y, the switch is
set to ON (added).
7 ) C H A R A C T E R P H A S E c o n tro l
Adjusts the horizontal phase of the signal output from the
CHARACTER connector, refer ring to the reference signal. Adjust the
phase by monitoring the signal on the monitor screen.
81
1 ) +5 V in d ic a to r
Lights when +5 V power to the board.
2 ) O P E R AT I O N switc h
NORMAL: Set to this position for normal operation.
EMERGENCY: Set to this position when the CNU-500 or MSU-
700 cannot function normally. The RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panels are directly
connected to their respective camera control
units.
The switch is set to NORMAL at the factor y.
3 ) M O D E switc h
0: Factor y setting
1: When the switch is set to this position, the UP/ DOWN switch
is activated, and the switch changes the character page
displayed on a monitor connected to the CHARACTER
connector.
2 through F: Not used.
4 ) U P /D O WN switc h
Changes the page displayed on the monitor screen. This switch
functions only when the MODE switch is set to 1. The contents of
each page are shown in the following table.
Page Contents
1 Nothing appears when power is turned on. Shows a warning if a problem
is detected by the self-diagnosis of the camera.
2 Connection status of Cameras 1 through 6.
3 Not used.
4 Not used.
5 Shows the results of auto set-up of Cameras 1 through 6.
6 Cannot be used.
7 DIAGNOSIS OF ALL CAMERAS display, which shows the results of the
self-diagnosis of all the cameras.
8 Not used.
9 DIAGNOSIS OF ONE CAMERA display, which shows the results of the
self-diagnosis of the selected camera.
10 DATA OF ALL CAMERAS display, which shows the setting status of each
camera.
11 DATA OF ONE CAMERA display, which shows the setting status of the
selected camera.
(h) VCS-700
POWER
Front panel VIDEO SELECTOR
1
CHARACTER INPUT connectors 3
WF 1 through WF 6 INPUT connectors 8
WF A INPUT connector 9
WF A OUTPUT connector 10
WF B OUTPUT connector 11
PIX 1 through PIX 6 INPUT connectors 2
PIX A INPUT connector 4
PIX A OUTPUT connector 5
PIX B OUTPUT connector 6
SYNC OUT connector 7
~AC IN connector 15
I/O PORT connector 14
REMOTE connector 13
WF MODE connector
12
Rear Panel
10
82
This switch tur ns the power ON and OFF. The indicator illuminates
when power is switched on.
2 ) P I X1 th ro u g h P I X6 I N P U T p ic tu re m o n ito r 1 th ro u g h 6 in p u t)
c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Accept video signals for a picture monitor. Connect each of these
connectors to the PIX2 OUTPUT connector on the CCU-700A/ 700AP
Camera Control Unit. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to
about 30 meters (99 feet) long can be compensated with the switch
on the inter nal board. For details, refer to the system manual.
3 ) C H A R A C T E R I N P U T c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Accept character signals. The input signal is mixed with the signal
output from the PIX OUTPUT connector. Connect to the
CHARACTER connector on the CNU-700 Camera Command
Network Unit. When using two VCS-700 units, connect either of
these connectors to the CHARACTER INPUT connector on a second
VCS-700. When a bridge connection is not made, be sure to
terminate with 75 ohms.
4 ) P I X A I N P U T p ic tu re m o n ito r A in p u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Connect to the PIX A OUTPUT connector on a second VCS-700 when
using two or more VCS-700 selectors.
5 ) P I X A O U T P U T p ic tu re m o n ito r A o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C
typ e )
Supplies a video signal for a picture monitor. Select the output signal
with the camera select buttons on an MSU-700 or by command from
the I/ O PORT connector on the VCS-700 Video Selector. When using
two or more VCS-700 units, connect this connector to the PIX A
INPUT connector on each subsequent VCS-700, and a picture
monitor to the PIX A OUTPUT connector on the final VCS-700 in the
series connection.
6 ) P I X B O U T P U T p ic tu re m o n ito r B o u tp u t ) c o n n e c to r B N C
typ e )
Supplies the same video signal for a picture monitor as the PIX A
OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to
about 100 meters (330 feet) long can be compensated with the switch
on the inter nal board. When you connect a picture monitor using a
long connecting cable, connect it to this connector. When using two
or more VCS-700 units connected in series, connect a picture monitor
to the PIX B OUTPUT loop connector on the VCS-700 whose PIX A
OUTPUT connector is not used for series connection. For details on
cable compensation, refer to the system manual.
7 ) S YN C O U T syn c sig n a l o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Supplies the sync signal for a picture monitor.
8 ) WF 1 th ro u g h WF 6 I N P U T wa ve fo rm m o n ito r 1 th ro u g h 6
in p u t) c o n n e c to rs B N C typ e )
Accept video signals for a waveform monitor. Connect these
connectors as required to the WF2 OUTPUT connector on CCU-
700A/ 700AP Camera Control Units. The signal loss of a connecting
cable up to about 30 meters (99 feet) long can be compensated with
the switch on the inter nal board. For details, refer to the system
manual.
9 ) WF A I N P U T wa ve fo rm m o n ito r A in p u t) c o n n e c to r B N C typ e )
Connect to the WF A OUTPUT connector on a second VCS-700 when
using two of these units.
1 0 ) WF A O U T P U T wa ve fo rm m o n ito r A o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r B N C
typ e )
Supplies the video signal for a waveform monitor. Select the output
signal with the camera select buttons on an MSU-700 or by command
from the I/ O PORT connector on a VCS-700. When using two or
more VCS-700 units, connect this connector to the WF A INPUT
connector on each subsequent VCS-700, and a waveform monitor to
the WF A OUTPUT loop connector on the VCS-700 which is the last
unit in the series connection.
1 1 ) WF B O U T P U T wa ve fo rm m o n ito r B o u tp u t) c o n n e c to r
B N C typ e )
Supplies the same video signal for a waveform monitor as the WF A
OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a connecting up to 100 meters
(330 feet) cable long can be compensated with the switch on the
inter nal board. When you connect a waveform monitor using long
connecting cable, connect it to this connector. When using two or
more VCS-700 units connected in series, connect a waveform monitor
to the PIX B OUTPUT connector on the VCS-700 whose WF A
OUTPUT loop connector is not used for series connection. For
details on cable compensation, refer to the system manual.
1 2 ) WF M O D E wa ve fo rm m o n ito r m o d e ) c o n n e c to r 4 -p in )
Connect to a cor responding connector on a waveform monitor to
view the signals in sequential mode. This connector supplies a
staircase signal and sequential ON/ OFF control signal.
Connect a CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit using a CCA-5
cable.
1 4 ) I /O P O R T re m o te c o n tro l c o n n e c to r D -su b 3 7 -p in )
Accepts and supplies exter nal control signals. You can select the
signals output to a picture monitor and a waveform monitor with an
exter nal video selector connected to this connector. The selected
input connector number is supplied from this connector.
The power cord can be fixed to the VCS-700 using the supplied plug
holder.
83
(i) MSU-700
O p e ra tio n P a n e l
1 ) A ll b u tto n
Press the button so it star ts flashing to activate the 13 buttons
located to the right (from CAM PW to AUTO SETUP) for all the
connected cameras of the same group. Allows simultaneous control
of these functions for all connected cameras
2 ) C A M P W c a m e ra p o we r b u tto n
Press this button to tur n the power supply to the camera ON. The
button illumination flashes until the camera is ready for transmission.
When you press this button again the power supply to the camera is
tur ned off and the button flashes again.
3 ) VF P W vie wfin d e r p o we r b u tto n
Press and illuminate this button to tur n the power supply to the
viewfinder ON. When you press the button again the illumination
and the power supply are tur ned off.
4 ) S ig n a l o u tp u t se le c t b u tto n s
Press and illuminate one of these buttons to activate the camera test
MULTI
CARD
FILE
PAINT
CONFIGURATION
MAINTENANCE
MODE
MULTI
TALLY
PARA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PANEL
ACTIVE
EXPAND
SCENE FILES STORE
1 2 3 4 5
KNEE
OFF
DETAIL
OFF
LVLDEP
OFF
GAMMA
OFF
CHROMA
OFF
MATRIX
OFF
KNEE
APERTURE
KNEE
SAT
MONO
COLOR
COLOR
CORRECT
5600K AUTO
KNEE
SKIN
DETAIL
DETAIL
GATE
SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK
GAMMA
CHARACTER
AUTO
EXT
IRIS MASTER BLACK
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
ECS
ON
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA ACCESS MASTERGAIN
ND FILTER CTRL
1 R 2 G 3 B 4 ENC 5
A B C D E
CC
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
LEVEL
WHITE BLACK
START/
BREAK
AUTO SETUP
R G B ENC SEQ
CLOSE button 5
STANDARD button 6
AUTO SETUP block 7
Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons 8
Scene file control block 9
Menu operation block 10
Iris control block 21
Camera number/tally indication
window
20
CALL button 19
MASTER BLACK control block 18
IRIS/MB ACTIVE button 17
ECS/Shutter control block (left)
Gamma control block (center)
Master gain control block (right)
16
Camera select block 14
Filter control block 15
WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons 13
PICTURE MONITOR
buttons
12
PC card insertion block 11
Signal output select buttons 4
VF PW button 3
CAM PW button 2
ALL button 1
signal generator and output the selected signal.
TEST1: To output a sawtooth signal to test the video circuit.
TEST2: To output a staircase signal.
BARS: To output a color bar signal.
N o te The BARS button takes priority over the other two buttons. If the
BARS button is illuminated, press it to tur n off the illumination before
pressing the TEST1 or TEST2 button.
5 ) C L O S E iris c lo se ) b u tto n
Press and illuminate the button to close the lens iris. Press again to
release the close mode.
6 ) S TA N D A R D b u tto n
When this button is pressed, the camera is initialized to its standard
state, the button remaining illuminated for several seconds. If you
press the button while it is lit, the cameras retur ns its state before
the button was lit. For details, refer to the system manual.
10
84
7 ) A U T O S E T U P b lo c k
(a) Auto adjustment item select buttons
Press and illuminate these buttons to select the items to be
automatically adjusted.
SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue.
LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc.
(b) START/BREAK button
Press to star t automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button
is illuminated during adjustment and the illumination is tur ned off
when the adjustments are complete. If you press the button while it
is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button
flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
(c) WHITE (white balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button is
illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the
adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is
illuminated, or press the START/ BREAK button, the automatic
adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing,
press the button again.
(d) BLACK (black balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The
button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until
the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is
N o te s
* If an er ror occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes.
* The leftmost button is for future use and has no cur rent function.
8 ) C A M E R A /C C U F U N C T I O N O N /O F F b u tto n s
Various functions of a camera and a CCU-700A/ 700AP can be tur ned
on and off from this unit. The following switching functions are
assigned to 18 of the buttons at the factor y, the remaining nine
buttons are reser ved for future use.
* U p p e r ro w O F F wh e n th e b u tto n is illu m in a te d )
KNEE OFF: Knee compensation function.
DETAIL OFF: Detail compensation function.
LVL DEP OFF: Level dependent function which controls the
details in the dark par t of a picture.
GAMMA OFF: Gamma function.
CHROMA OFF: Chroma function.
MATRIX OFF: Multi matrix function to enhance color fidelity.
* M id d le ro w O N wh e n th e b u tto n is illu m in a te d )
KNEE APERTURE: Knee aper ture function.
KNEE SAT: Knee saturation function.
MONO COLOR: Mono color function that replaces the color
information of a picture with a single color
that can be varied, for example to give a sepia
tone effect.
COLOR CORRECT: Color cor rection function for a par ticular
hue range.
* L o we r ro w O N wh e n th e b u tto n is illu m in a te d )
5600K: 5600K electronic color temperature conversion function
AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. While this button is
illuminated (ON), the knee point is automatically
adjusted according to the light content of the
picture.
SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function
DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. While the button
is illuminated (ON), the adjustment range of
the skin tone detail is displayed in white on the
monitor screen.
SATURATION: Saturation function
CONTRAST: Contrast function
BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function
CHARACTER: System information display function. When this
button is illuminated (ON), various information
about the entire system is displayed on the
monitor connected to the CHARACTER
connector of the CNU-700. The display contents
can be changed through menu operation.
9 ) S c e n e file c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) SCENE FILES buttons
While the STORE button is flashing: When you press one of
these buttons, the cur rent setting data is stored as a file
with the cor responding number.
When the STORE button is not illuminated: The stored data
is retrieved by pressing and illuminating the button with
the desired number. Press the button again to tur n the
illumination off and continue with the previous status.
(b) STORE button
To store a scene file, first press this button so that the button star ts
flashing, then press the SCENE FILES button with the desired
number. When file registration is completed, the STORE button
illumination is tur ned off. To cancel registration, press the flashing
button again before pressing the SCENE FLIES button. The STORE
button illumination is tur ned off.
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
LEVEL
WHITE BLACK
START/
BREAK
AUTO SETUP
a b c d
KNEE
OFF
DETAIL
OFF
LVLDEP
OFF
GAMMA
OFF
CHROMA
OFF
MATRIX
OFF
KNEE
APERTURE
KNEE
SAT
MONO
COLOR
COLOR
CORRECT
5600K AUTO
KNEE
SKIN
DETAIL
DETAIL
GATE
SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK
GAMMA
CHARACTER
SCENE FILES STORE
1 2 3 4 5
a b
85
1 0 ) M e n u o p e ra tio n b lo c k
(a) MODE (mode select) buttons
Select menu mode. If you press and illuminate one of these buttons,
the menu for the selected mode appears on the EL display. When the
illuminated button is pressed its illumination is tur ned off and the
menu on the display also disappears.
MULTI: Multi setting mode to set the requirements for
Master/ Slave mode to set up multiple cameras in
synchronization.
CARD: PC card operation mode to set the requirements for
using PC cards. Card data can also be duplicated in this
mode.
CONFIGUARTION: Configuration mode to configure this unit
and the entire camera system.
MAINTENECE: Maintenance mode. The H and SC phases of
the CCU-700A/ 700AP are set in this mode.
FILE: File operation mode. Storing, retrieving and transfer ring
reference files, lens files and scene files in the camera or
on a PC card.
PAINT: Paint control mode. Various paint items, such as white,
black and flare, are adjusted in this mode.
(b) Control knobs (rotary encoders)
Adjust the selected items on the touch panel.
(c) EL display/touch panel
Displays the menu selected with the MODE buttons and permits the
displayed items to be adjusted. For display example, see the
following description.
MULTI
CARD
FILE
PAINT
CONFIGURATION
MAINTENANCE
MODE
c
b
a
To clear the adjusted values
(see the adjustment display).
Press to return to the first page
of the menu.
Press either to flip the pages of
the menu.
Current page number/Total number
of pages
(1/3 means that the Paint menu
consists of 3 pages in all and that
the first page of the menu is
displayed at present.)
The names of the items (item
groups) are displayed.
Press the name of the item
(item group) to be adjusted.
The pressed name area
lights in reverse status and
the lower half of the panel
becomes the adjustment
display.
V Mod
Saw
Detail
Clear Home
Black White Flare
Skin
Detail
Sat/
Contrast
Gamma
/Knee
1
3
Gamma/Knee
Gamma
Off
Gamma Blk Gamma Knee Point Knee Slope
-28 6 -21 10
Black
Gamma
V Mod
Saw
Detail
Clear Home
Reversed
The name of the selected item (item
group) is displayed.
By pressing this area after pressing
"Clear" whereupon it is displayed in
reverse status, all the adjustment
values for the selected item (item
group) are initialized to standard.
When there are any ON/OFF
functions related to the adjustment,
the names of the functions are
displayed on this line.
You can turn these functions on/off
by pressing their names in the same
manner as with the camera/CCU
function ON/OFF buttons.
The adjustment parameters (items) for the selected item (item group)
and their adjustment values are displayed.
By pressing a value area after pressing "Clear" whereupon it is
displayed in reverse status, that adjustment value is initialized to
standard.
Black White Flare
Skin
Detail
Sat/
Contrast
Gamma
/Knee
Knee Off
1
3
Auto
Knee
M e n u d isp la y
Example: when the paint menu is selected (PAINT buttons
illuminated).
A d ju stm e n t d isp la y
Example: Gamma/ knee adjustment display (when Gamma/
Knee is selected from the paint menu).
10
86
S u b m e n u
Example: Submenu of Detail (when Detail is selected from
the Paint menu).
1 1 ) P C c a rd in se rtio n b lo c k
(a) PC card slot
Inser t a PC card (which conforms to PCMCIA) to store reference
files, lens files and scene files of the camera or the CCU-700A/ 700AP.
(b) Eject button
Press to eject the inser ted PC card.
(c) ACCESS indicator
This indicator is illuminated green when a PC card is cor rectly
inser ted in the PC card slot. The illumination changes to red during
data access. If the built-in batter y in the PC card is exhausted, this
indicator illuminates in orange. For batter y replacement, refer to the
instr uctions for the PC card.
1 2 ) P I C T U R E M O N I T O R b u tto n
Press to select the output signal from the PIX2 OUTPUT connector
of the CCU-700A/ 700AP. The signal cor responding to the illuminated
button is output.
R/ G/ B: Select the R signal, G signal or B signal. These signals
can be selected either independently or in combination.
When any of these buttons is pressed, the encoder
circuit is tur ned off.
ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/ G/ B
circuits are tur ned off and an encoded signal is
output.
1 3 ) WAVE F O R M M O N I T O R b u tto n s
Press to select the output signal from the WF2 OUTPUT connector
button is output.
R/ G/ B: Select the R signal, G signal or B signal. These signals
can be selected either independently or in combination.
When any of these buttons is pressed, the SEQ and
ENC circuits are tur ned off.
SEQ (sequence): When this button is pressed, the R/ G/ B
circuits are tur ned off and the SEQ signal is
output. You can monitor the waveforms of the
three R, G and B signals in sequence on a
waveform monitor.
ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/ G/ B and
SEQ circuits are tur ned off and the ENC signal
is output.
Detail 1
Detail
2
Detail
1
Level Limiter Crispening Level Dep
3 -7 42 99
Detail
3
Level
Dep Off
If the selected item group consists of
multiple item groups, a submenu is
displayed.
Press the desired submenu item
(Detail 1, Detail 2 or Detail 3 in this
example).
Detail
Off
b
c
a
ACCESS
1 4 ) C a m e ra se le c t b lo c k
(a) PANEL ACTIVE button
Press and illuminate this button to permit the cameras selected with
the camera select button to be controlled from this unit. The
IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button also illuminates. If you press the button
when it is lit, the illumination is tur ned off and the operational panel
MULTI
TALLY
PARA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PANEL
ACTIVE
EXPAND
c d b a
g f e
of this unit is locked.
(b) PARA (parallel mode) button
Press and illuminate this button to activate the Parallel mode, which
enables simultaneous operation with another control panel. If you
press the button when it is lit, the illumination is tur ned off and the
87
Parallel mode is canceled.
(c) MULTI indicators
Show the Master/ Slave status of the cor responding cameras 1
through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not illuminated) or 13
through 24 (when the EXPAND button is illuminated). The indicator
for the camera which is specified as the master for Master/ Slave
mode illuminates green. The indicators for the slave cameras are
illuminated orange. This tur ns to red during the auto set-up of the
cor responding cameras. If an er ror occurs during the auto set-up and
the operation is inter r upted, they flash in red.
(d) TALLY indicators
Show the tally status of the cor responding cameras 1 through 12
(when the EXPAND button is not illuminated) or 13 through 24
(when the EXPAND button is illuminated). The cor responding
indicator illuminates in red when a red tally is sent to a camera, and
it illuminates in green when a green tally is sent. When both red and
green tally are sent, it illuminates in orange. When a call signal is
sent to the camera, the indicator rapidly flashes in red.
(e) Active indicators
Show the control status of the cor responding cameras 1 through 12
(when the EXPAND button is not illuminated) or 13 through 24
(when the EXPAND button is illuminated). The indicators for the
cameras under control of this unit illuminate in green and the
indicators for the cameras under control of another control panel
illuminate in orange. An indicator whose cor responding camera (or
camera control unit) is not connected does not illuminate. An
indicator illuminates in red when an er ror is detected and the self-
diagnostic functions are activated in the cor responding camera or
camera control unit.
(f) Camera select buttons
Select the cameras to be controlled from this unit. Press and
illuminate the button cor responding to each desired camera.
Cameras 1 through 12 are selected when the EXPAND button is not
illuminated, and cameras 13 through 24 are selected when the
EXPAND button is illuminated.
(g) EXPAND button
Press to select the group to be selected with the camera select
buttons. Cameras 1 through 12 can be chosen when their select
buttons are not illuminated, and cameras 13 through 24 can be
chosen when their buttons are illuminated.
N o te The CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit is required to control
multiple cameras using the camera select function.
1 5 ) F ilte r c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) FILTER CTRL (filter control) button
Press and illuminate the button to enable filter selection with the CC
and ND filter select buttons of this unit.
(b) ND (ND filter select) buttons
While the FILTER CTRL button is illuminated, press and illuminate
ND FILTER CTRL
a b
c
1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E
CC
one of these buttons to select the cor responding ND filter.
1: Clear
2: 1/ 4 ND
3: 1/ 8 ND
4: 1/ 16 ND
5: 1/ 64 ND
When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the button
cor responding to the filter selected at the camera is illuminated.
(c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons
one of these buttons to select the cor responding CC filter.
A: Cross filter
B: 3200 K
C: 4300 K
D: 6300 K
E: 8000 K
When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the button
cor responding to the filter selected at the camera is illuminated.
1 6 ) E C S /S h u tte r c o n tro l b lo c k le ft)
G a m m a c o n tro l b lo c k c e n te r
M a ste r g a in c o n tro l b lo c k rig h t)
(a) ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button
Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to ECS mode.
Press again and tur n off the button illumination to set the camera to
Shutter mode.
(b) ON button
Tur ns the ECS function on and off (when the ECS button is
illuminated) or the shutter function (when the ECS button is not
illuminated). The function is ON when this button is illuminated.
(c) ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons and display
window
In ECS mode (when the ECS button is illuminated): The
selected ECS frequency is displayed in the window.
Press to select the desired scan frequency. The
frequency increases when the L(up) button is pressed
and decreases when the M(down) button is pressed. It
continuously changes while either button remains
pressed.
In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not
illuminated): The denominator of the selected step
shutter speed is displayed in the window. Press to select
the desired shutter speed. The speed is displayed in the
window. Press to select the desired shutter speed. The
speed increases when the L(up) button is pressed and
decreases when the M(down) button is pressed. It
pressed.
ECS
ON
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA MASTER GAIN
a
b c d e
10
88
(d) GAMMA select buttons and display window
Select the step gamma. The selected value is displayed in the
window. The gamma value decreases when the L(up) button is
pressed and increases when the M(down) button is pressed. It
continuously changes while either button remains pressed.
N o te The higher the gamma effect, the lower the value.
(e) MASTER GAIN select buttons and display window
Select the appropriate video gain according to the illumination of the
subject to be shot. The selected value (dB) is displayed in the
window. The gain value increases when the L(up) button is pressed
and decreases when the M(down) button is pressed. It continuously
changes either button remains pressed.
1 7 ) I R I S /M B A C T I VE iris/m a ste r b la c k a c tive ) b u tto n
Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris and master black
adjustment functions of this unit. When the PANEL ACTIVE button
is pressed, this button automatically illuminates. To disable only the
iris/ master black control block of the panel, press this button so that
it is not illuminated.
1 8 ) M A S T E R B L A C K c o n tro l b lo c k
Tur n the control to adjust the master black level. The adjustment
value is displayed in the display window.
Press to send a call signal to the camera, on which the CALL button
is illuminated. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp
on the CCU-700A/ 700AP light if they not illuminated, or are tur ned
off if they where illuminated. When the CALL button on the camera
is pressed, the CALL button on this unit illuminates and a buzzer
sounds.
2 0 ) C a m e ra n u m b e r/ta lly in d ic a tio n win d o w
The number of the camera being controlled from this unit is
displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, its
number is displayed in black against a red background. When a
green tally signal is sent to the camera, its number is displayed in
black against a green background. When both the red and green
tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background
is red and the right half is green.
2 1 ) I ris c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) EXT (lens extender) indicator
Illuminated when the lens extender is in use.
(b) IRIS control and display window
When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris
manually by tur ning this control. The adjustment value is shown in f
numbers on the display. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the
reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of
+/ -1f stop with this control. When the iris is closed, CL is displayed
in the window.
(c) AUTO button
Press and illuminate the button and the iris automatically adjusts to
the amount of input light. If you press the button when it is
illuminated, the illumination is tur ned off and manual iris adjustment
is enabled.
AUTO
EXT
IRIS
a
b
c
C o n n e c to r P a n e l
1 ) F U S E h o ld e r
Accommodates the fuse.
2 ) P O WE R switc h
Tur ns the power to the unit on and off.
3 ) ~ A C I N A C p o we r in p u t) c o n n e c to r
The power cord can be fixed to this unit using the supplied plug
holder.
4 ) C C U /C N U R E M O T E c a m e ra c o n tro l u n it/c a m e ra c o m m a n d
n e two rk u n it re m o te ) c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
1
FUSE holder
2
POWER switch
3
~AC IN connector
4
CCU/CNU REMOTE connector
5
AUX REMOTE connector
6
I/O PORT connector
FUSE
POWER
~AUX IN
REMOTE
AUX
I/O PORT
CCU/CNU
Connect to the RCP/ CNU connector of the CCU-700A/ 700AP or the
MSU connector of the CNU-700.
5 ) A U X R E M O T E a u x ilia ry re m o te ) c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
6 ) I /O P O R T c o n n e c to r 5 0 -p in )
Reser ved for future use.
89
j C o n n e c tio n E x a m p le
When a CNU-500 is used as the ner ve center of a star-shaped
network, up to six CCU-700A/ 700AP units, up to six RCP-700 Series
Remote Control Panels, a VCS-700 Video Selector and an MSU-700
Master Set-up Unit can be connected to the CNU-500.
N o te The video input connectors on the CCU-700A/ 700AP, VCS-700 and
CNU-500 which have loop-through configuration but are not being used for
bridge connections, should be terminated with a 75 ohm termination.
CCU 2 CCU 1 CCU 3 CCU 4 CCU 5 CCU 6 MSU
RCP 2 RCP 1 RCP 3 RCP 4 RCP 5 RCP 6 CS AUX
RS232C
REFERENCE
CHARACTER
AC IN
~AC IN
POWER
FUSE
BVP-900 Series
Color Video Camera
Control console
Picture monitor
Waveform monitor
AC power
source
AC power source
VCS-700
CCU-700A/700AP
RCP-700-series
CNU-500
RS-232C cable
Reference signal
AC power cord
(supplied)
AC power
source
AC power source
MSU-700
Computer for ISR system
W
F

2
P
I
X

2
R
C
P
/
C
N
U
CHARECTER
CHARECTER
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
REMOTE
WF 1
CCU/CNU
RCP 1 CCU 1
PIX 1
VCS
MSU
CCU/CNU
AC IN RS232C
I/O PORT
AUX CCU/CNU
REMOTE
10
90
(j) RCP-740/741
LOCK
AUTO SETUP
PARA MASTER SLAVE
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
CHARACTER
CLEAR
PAINT
LOCK
BLACK
GAMMA
CONTRAST
SATURATION
DETAIL
GATE
SKIN
DETAIL
KNEE POINT
SATURATION
SKIN DETAIL
R GAMMA
R FLARE
DTL LEVEL
KNEE SLOPE
CONTRAST
SKIN PHASE
M GAMMA
G FLARE
DTL LIMITER
SKIN WIDTH
B GAMMA
B FLARE
BLK LIMITER
SKIN SAT
BLK GAMMA
DTL CRISP
AUTO
KNEE
5600K
STANDARD
LEVEL
WHITE BLACK
START/
BREAK
CAM PW VF PW TEST1 TEST2 BARS
1 R G B SEQ
ECS
ON
ENC 2 3 4 5
SCENE FILES MONITOR SELECT STORE
1 A B C D E 2 3 4 5
ND
WHITE
BLACK
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
AUTO
SENS
SENS
COARSE
EXT
CLOSE OPEN
COARSE
CLOSE OPEN
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
11
15
22
CLO
ALARM
CALL
AUTO
IRIS
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
MASTERBLACK
CLOSE
CLOSE
PREVIEW
PANEL
ACTIVE
ALARM
CALL
PANEL
ACTIVE
MASTER
BLACK
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA
ABSOLUTE
CC FILTERCTRL
EXT
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
11
15
22
CLOSE
IRIS
MASTERGAIN
RCP-740
RCP-741
STANDARD button
Control select block
Power and output signal select block
AUTO SETUP block
Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
Paint control block
Scene file control block (left), Monitor select block (right)
ECS/Shutter control block (left), Gamma control block (center),
Master gain control block (right),
Filter control block
White balance/black balance control block
Reserved block (does not function at present)
Camera number/tally indication window
ALARM indicator
CALL button
PANEL ACTIVE button
ALARM indicator
Iris/master black control block
CALL button
PANEL ACTIVE button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
14
13
12
13
12
91
When this button is pressed, it remains illuminated for several
seconds while the camera is initialized to its standard state. If the
button is pressed while illuminated, the camera rever ts to the state
before the button was illuminated. For details, refer to the system
manual.
2 ) C o n tro l se le c t b lo c k
(a) LOCK button
Press and illuminate this button to disable controls except those in
the iris/ master black control block. Press the button again to enable
the controls.
This button is illuminated when the Parallel mode is active, in which
simultaneous operation with another control panel is possible. When
this button is illuminated, all the buttons and controls on this panel,
except for the iris/ master black control block, are active - even if the
PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated. If you press the button
when it is illuminated, the illumination is tur ned off and the Parallel
mode is canceled.
(c) MASTER and SLAVE buttons
When adjusting the white balance of multiple cameras in
Master/ Slave mode, it is necessar y to decide which is to be the
master camera and which are to be slave cameras. Press and
illuminate the MASTER button to specify the connected camera to be
the master. Press and illuminate the SLAVE button to specify the
connected camera to be a slave. The slave camera follows the master
camera settings. If you press a button when it is illuminated, the
illumination is tur ned off.
3 ) P o we r a n d o u tp u t sig n a l se le c t b lo c k
(a) CAM PW (camera power) button
camera ON. (The button flashes until the camera is ready for
transmission.) When you press this button again, it star ts flashing
and the power supply is tur ned off.
(b) VF PW (viewfinder power) button
viewfinder ON. When you press the button again, the illumination
goes out and the power supply is tur ned off.
(c) Signal output select buttons
Press and illuminated one of these buttons to activate the test signal
generator of the camera and send the following signals.
TEST1: Send a sawtooth signal to test the video circuits.
TEST2: Send a staircase signal.
BARS: Send a color bar signal.
N o te The BARS button takes priority over the other two buttons. If the
BARS button is illuminated, press the button to tur n the illumination off
before pressing the TEST1 or TEST2 button.
(b) STRAT/BREAK button
is illuminated until adjustment is complete. If you press the button
while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again.
N o te s
* If an er ror occurs during adjustment, the selected button flashes.
* The leftmost button is for future use and has no function at present.
5 ) C a m e ra /C C U fu n c tio n O N /O F F b u tto n s
Various functions of the camera and the CCU-700A/ 700AP can be
tur ned on and off from this panel. The following switching functions
are assigned to eight of the buttons at the factor y. The other two
buttons are reser ved for future use. Press and illuminate these
buttons to tur n on the respective function. Press again so that the
button is not illuminated to tur n off the function.
AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is
illuminated, the knee point is automatically
picture.
SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function.
LOCK
PARA MASTER SLAVE
a b c
CAM PW VF PW TEST1 TEST2 BARS
a b c
AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
LEVEL
WHITE BLACK
START/
BREAK
a b c d
CHARACTER BLACK
GAMMA
CONTRAST
SATURATION
DETAIL
GATE
SKIN
DETAIL
AUTO
KNEE
5600K
10
92
DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When this
button is illuminated, the adjustment range of
monitor screen.
SATURATION: Saturation function.
CONTRAST: Contrast function.
BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function.
CHARACTER: Self-diagnostic display function. When this
button is illuminated, details of the CCU-
700A/ 700AP diagnosis are displayed on the
OUTPUT connector of the CCU-700A/ 700AP.
This information is also mixed with the video
signal output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector.
Each time you press this button, the status
changes as follows.
Off ON (page 1) ON (page2) ... ON (page n)
The contents of the self-diagnosis can be displayed as required, even
if this button is not illuminated.
6 ) P a in t c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) Paint controls (rotary encoders) and LED level markers
Adjust the items selected with the paint item select buttons L and M.
The LED level markers illuminate to indicate the adjusted value of
the respective items. A marker to which an item is not assigned is
not illuminated.
(b) CLEAR button
Press and hold for more than one second to clear the manually
adjusted settings of the selected items and continue with the
standard settings (which can be defined by the user).
(c) Paint item select buttons and indicators
Press either the L(up) and M(down) button to illuminate the green
indicator cor responding to the paint items to be adjusted. The names
of the selected items are illuminated in yellow and can be adjusted
using the respective paint controls (rotar y encoders).
KNEE POINT/ KNEE SLOPE: To adjust the knee point and
knee slope using the left two controls.
SATURATION/ CONTRAST: To adjust the saturation and
contrast using the left two controls.
SKIN DETAIL/ SKIN PHASE/ SKIN WIDTH/ SKIN SAT: To
adjust the detail level, phase, bandwidth and saturation of
the skin tone, respectively using the four controls.
R GAMMA/ G GAMMA/ B GAMMA: To adjust the gamma
balance with the left three controls.
R FLARE/ B FLARE/ G FLARE: To adjust the flare balance
CLEAR
PAINT
LOCK
KNEE POINT
SATURATION
SKIN DETAIL
R GAMMA
R FLARE
DTL LEVEL
KNEE SLOPE
CONTRAST
SKIN PHASE
M GAMMA
G FLARE
DTL LIMITER
SKIN WIDTH
B GAMMA
B FLARE
BLK LIMITER
SKIN SAT
BLK GAMMA
DTL CRISP
a
d
c
b
with the left three controls.
DTL LEVEL/ DTL LIMITER/ BLK LIMITER/ DTL CRISP: To
adjust the detail level, detail limiter level, black limiter
level and detail crisp level, using the four controls
respectively.
N o te When the cor responding paint function is not active, the item name is
not illuminated in yellow and the item cannot be controlled from this panel.
(d) PAINT LOCK button
Press and illuminated the button to disable paint control from this
panel. While this button is illuminated, only item switching with the
paint item select buttons L and M are enabled.
7 ) S c e n e file c o n tro l b lo c k le ft)
M o n ito r se le c t b lo c k rig h t)
can be retrieved by pressing and illuminating the button
cor responding to the required file number. Press the
button to tur n the illumination off and continue with the
previous status.
(b) STORE button
number. When file registration is complete, the STORE button is no
longer illuminated. To cancel the registration, press the flashing
button again before pressing the SCENE FLIES button. The STORE
button illumination is tur ned off.
(c) MONITOR SELECT buttons
Press to select the output signal from the PIX1 and WF1 OUTPUT
connectors of the CCU-700A/ 700AP. The signal cor responding to the
illuminated button is output.
R/ G/ B: Select the R signal, G signal or B signal. The signals can
be selected either independently or in combination and
are output from the PIX1 and WF1 OUTPUT connectors.
When any of these buttons is pressed, the SEQ and ENC
circuits are tur ned off.
SEQ (sequential): When this button is pressed, the R/ G/ B
circuits for the WF1 OUTPUT are tur ned off and the
SEQ signal is output from the WF1 OUTPUT connector.
You can monitor the waveforms of the R, G and B signals
in sequence on a monitor connected to the WF1
OUTPUT connector. The PIX1 OUTPUT connector
continues outputting the same signal as it was before
this button was pressed.
ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/ G/ B and
SEQ circuits for both the WF1 and PIX1 OUTPUTs are
tur ned off. The ENC signal is output from both the WF1
and PIX1 OUTPUT connectors.
1 R G B SEQ ENC 2 3 4 5
SCENE FILES MONITOR SELECT STORE
a b c
93
8 ) E C S /S h u tte r c o n tro l b lo c k le ft)
G a m m a c o n tro l b lo c k c e n te r
Press and illuminate this button to put the camera into ECS mode.
Press again and tur n off the button illumination to set the camera
into Shutter mode.
(b) ON button
illuminated). The selected function is ON when this button is
illuminated.
(c) ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons and display
window
changes continuously while either button remains
pressed.
In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not
illuminated): The denominator of the selected step
shutter speed is displayed in the window. Press to select
the desired shutter speed. The speed increases when the
L(up) button is pressed and decreases when the
M(down) button is pressed. It changes continuously
while either button remains pressed.
(d) GAMMA select buttons and display window
Selects the step gamma. The selected value is displayed in the
window. The gamma value decreases when the L(up) button is
pressed and increases when the M(down) button is pressed. It
changes continuously while either button remains pressed.
N o te The lower the value, the higher the gamma effect.
(e) MASTER GAIN select buttons and display window
Select the appropriate video gain for the illumination of the subject to
be shot. The selected gain value (dB) is displayed in the window. The
gain value increases when the L(up) button is pressed and
decreases when the M(down) button is pressed. It continuously
changes while either button remains pressed.
9 ) F ilte r c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) ND (ND filter select) buttons
one of these buttons to select the cor responding ND filter.
1: Clear
2: 1/ 4 ND
3: 1/ 8 ND
4: 1/ 16 ND
5: 1/ 64 ND
When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the illumination of
the ND filter select buttons indicates the selection made at the
camera.
(b) FILTER CTRL (filter control) button
Press and illuminate the button to enable the selection of filters with
the CC and ND filter select buttons of the panel.
(c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons
one of these buttons to select the cor responding CC filter.
A: Cross filter
B: 3200 K (clear)
C: 4300 K
D: 6300 K
E: 8000 K
When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the illumination of
the ND filter select buttons indicates the selection made at the
camera.
1 0 ) Wh ite b a la n c e /b la c k b a la n c e c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) WHITE (white balance manual adjustment) knobs
Used to manually adjust the white balance. From the left, the knobs
are for R, G and B signal adjustment.
(b) BLACK (black balance manual adjustment) knobs
Used to manually adjust the black balance. From the left, the knobs
are for R, G and B signal adjustment.
(c) ABSOLUTE button
Press and illuminate the button to change to the Absolute mode for
manual adjustment of the R,G,B and WHITE and BLACK controls.
When this button is not illuminated , Relative mode is automatically
selected in the following cases.
* When an automatic set-up is completed.
* When a scene file is retrieved.
When the PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated, or the PARA,
MASTER or SLAVE button is illuminated, Relative mode is operative
and Absolute mode is inoperative.
The number of the camera being controlled from this panel is
ECS
ON
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA MASTER GAIN
a
b c d e
1 A B C D E 2 3 4 5
ND CC FILTER CTRL
a c b
WHITE
BLACK
ABSOLUTE
a
b
c
10
94
green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in
black against a green background. When the red and green tally
signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background is
illuminated red and the right half illuminated green.
1 2 ) P A N E L A C T I VE b u tto n
Press and illuminate this button to permit the panel to control the
camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button is
also illuminated.
illuminates. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on
the CCU-700A/ 700AP are illuminated if not already lit, or are tur ned
off if they were already illuminated.
When the CALL button on the camera is pressed, the CALL button
on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds.
1 4 ) A L A R M in d ic a to r
Lights when a problem occurs in the camera system. The self-
diagnostic function activates at the camera or the CCU-700A/ 700AP.
I ris/m a ste r b la c k c o n tro l b lo c k R C P -7 4 0 )
1 ) I R I S /M B A C T I VE iris/m a ste r b la c k a c tive ) b u tto n
Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris/ master black
control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is
pressed, this button is also illuminated.
2 ) I R I S R E L AT I VE b u tto n
When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the iris
adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and
illuminate the button for Relative mode, or press so that it is not
illuminated for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button
is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this
button is not operative.
3 ) F -n u m b e r d isp la y
Displays the f-number of the cur rent iris setting. When the iris is
closed, CL is displayed.
4 ) E XT le n s e x te n d e r in d ic a to r
5 ) S E N S se n sitivity) c o n tro l k n o b
Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is
not operative when Relative mode is selected. See the table Iris
adjustment functions.
6 ) C O A R S E c o n tro l k n o b
Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table Iris adjustment
function.
Press and illuminate the button to close the iris.
8 ) A U T O b u tto n
is enabled.
9 ) I R I S in d ic a to r
The cor responding LED illuminates according to the iris setting.
When the IRIS RELATIVE button is not illuminated, the upper and
lower limits of the manual adjustment are displayed at a lower
luminous level.
1 0 ) I R I S c o n tro l le ve r/p re vie w switc h
manually by moving this lever. When the AUTO button is
illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be
set in a range of +/ -2f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
SENS
COARSE
EXT
CLOSE OPEN
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
11
15
22
CLO
ALARM
CALL
AUTO
IRIS
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
CLOSE
PANEL
ACTIVE
MASTER
BLACK
1
12
13
2
3
4
5
6
11
9
8
7
10
IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
MASTER BLACK
RELATIVE button
MASTER BLACK
indicator
IRIS RELATIVE button
F-number display
EXT indicator
SENS control knob
COARES control knob
Master black control ring
IRIS control lever/preview switch
IRIS indicator
AUTO button
CLOSE button
95
the signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the table Iris
adjustment function.
1 1 ) M a ste r b la c k c o n tro l rin g
Tur n to manually adjust the master black value.
1 2 ) M A S T E R B L A C K R E L AT I VE b u tto n
When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the master black
illuminate the button for relative mode, or press and tur n the
illumination off for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE
button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and
this button is not operative.
1 3 ) M A S T E R B L A C K in d ic a to r
The cor responding LED illuminates according to the master black
setting.
I ris a d ju stm e n t fu n c tio n s
IRIS lever (RCP-740)
IRIS control (RCP-741)
COARSE control
SENS control
Relative mode
(IRIS RELATIVE button lit)
Adjusts the relative value of
the iris over 1/4 of the total
range from OPEN to CLOSED.
Sets the range of iris settings
over which the iris can operate.
Does not function.
Absolute mode
(IRIS RELATIVE button not lit)
Adjusts the iris over the
variable range set by the
SENS and COARSE controls.
Sets the lower limit for
CLOSED.
Sets the upper limit for CLOSE
according to the CLOSED value
of the COARSE control.
RELATIVE AUTO SENS
COARSE
CLOSE OPEN
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
MASTER BLACK
CLOSE
PREVIEW
ALARM
CALL
PANEL
ACTIVE
EXT
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
11
15
22
CLOSE
IRIS
1 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
2 IRIS RELATIVE button
3
4
F-number display
EXT indicator
8
7
AUTO button
CLOSE button
5
6
SENS control knob
COARSE control knob
9 IRIS indicator
10 IRIS control
11 Iris gauge
12 MASTER BLACK
control and
indicator
13 PREVIEW button
Items 1) through 9) are the same as those shown for the RCP-740.
1 0 ) I R I S c o n tro l
The iris control joystick lever (RCP-740)/ control knob (RCP-741)
controls the lens iris setting. When the AUTO button is not
illuminated, full manual control of iris is provided. When the AUTO
button is illuminated, the lens iris can be trimmed over +/ -2 f stops.
Depressing the joystick lever (RCP-740)/ preview button (RCP-741)
provides the camera preview signal at the preview output. See the
table Iris adjustment functions
1 1 ) I ris g a u g e
The white line on the gauge provides a click position for the IRIS
control. Tur n the gauge to set the line to the most frequently used
iris position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris
adjustment. The gauge rotates infinitely in either direction. When no
click position is required, set the line outside the rotation range of
the IRIS control.
1 2 ) M A S T E R B L A C K c o n tro l a n d in d ic a to r
Manually adjusts the master black level. The adjustment is always
per formed in Relative mode. The cor responding LED illuminates
according to the master black setting.
1 3 ) P R E VI E W b u tto n
Connects the preview signal to the PREVIEW connector.
10
96
C o n n e c to r P a n e l 1 ) P R E VI E W c o n n e c to r 6 -p in )
Supplies preview signals. Power to light the PREVIEW button of the
RCP-741 is provided from an exter nal source, such as a video
switcher, through this connector.
Connects to the RCP/ CNU connector of a CCU-700A/ 700AP or the
RCP connector of a CNU-700 with a CCA-5-36XX cable.
Connects to an RCP-700/ 701 for remote control of iris and black level
at another location.
4 ) I /O P O R T c o n n e c to r 2 9 -p in )
Reser ved for future use.
PREVIEW REMOTE I/O PORT
CCU/CNU AUX
1 PREVIEW connector
2 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector
3 AUX REMOTE connector
4 I/O PORT connector
97
(k) RCP-730/731
5600K AUTO
KNEE
CHAR
ACTER
SKIN
DETAIL
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
DETAIL
GATE
PARA
LOCK
MASTER SLAVE
SAT
LEVEL
AUTO SETUP
START/
BREAK
BLACK
GAMMA
CHROMA
OFF
KNEE
OFF
DTL
OFF
GAMMA
OFF
KNEE
SAT
MONO
COLOR
COLOR
CORRECTOR
WHITE STANDARD BLACK
CLEAR
STORE SELECT MONITOR RECALL
ECS
ON
ECS/SHUTTER MASTER GAIN
SCENE CC
SEQ ENC
ND
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
DETAIL SKIN
DTL-1
SKIN
DTL-2
MONO
COLOR
COLOR
CORRECTOR
WHITE BLACK GAMMA FLARE KNEE/
WHT CUP
KNEE
POINT
KNEE
SLOPE
RELATIVE
PREVIEW
SENS
SENS
COARSE
CLOSE
IRIS
IRIS MASTER BLACK
OPEN
COARSE
OSE OPEN
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO CLOSE
AUTO CLOSE
<
PANEL
ACTIVE
EXT
EXT
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
11
15
22
CLOSE
IRIS
CALL
CALL
PANEL
ACTIVE
ALARM
ALARM
W H I
G B R
T E >
BLK GAMMA
/SAT
RCP-730
RCP-731
STANDARD button
ECS/Shutter control block
MONITOR SELECT buttons
window
ALARM indicator
CALL button
PANEL ACTIVE button
Control select block Power and output signal select block
AUTO SETUP block
MASTER GAIN buttons and display window
Camera/CCU function ON/OFF
buttons
Paint control block
Scene file control block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
window
7
8
9
10
ALARM indicator
CALL button
PANEL ACTIVE button
8
9
10
12
11
13
14
15
10
98
(a) LOCK button
Press and illuminate the button to disable controls except those in
the controls.
This button is illuminated when Parallel mode is active, in which
this button is illuminated, all the buttons and controls on this panel
(except for the iris/ master black control block) are active, even if the
when it is illuminated, the illumination is tur ned off and the Parallel
mode is canceled.
(c) MASTER and SLAVE buttons
manual.
Various functions of the camera or the CCU-700A/ 700AP can be
tur ned on and off from this panel. Functions except KNEE OFF, DTL
OFF, GAMMA OFF and CHROMA OFF are ON when the respective
buttons are illuminated.
picture.
LOCK
PARA MASTER SLAVE
a b c
5600K AUTO
KNEE
CHAR
ACTER
SKIN
DETAIL
DETAIL
GATE
SAT BLACK
GAMMA
CHROMA
OFF
KNEE
OFF
DTL
OFF
GAMMA
OFF
KNEE
SAT
MONO
COLOR
COLOR
CORRECTOR
monitor connected to the PIX (picture) output
of the CCU-700A/ 700AP.
SAT: Saturation function.
KNEE OFF: Knee compensation function. (OFF when the
button is illuminated)
DTL OFF: Detail compensation function. (OFF when the button
is illuminated)
GAMMA OFF: Gamma function. (OFF when the button is
illuminated)
CHRAMA OFF: Chroma function. (OFF when the button is
illuminated)
KNEE SAT: Knee saturation function.
MONO COLOR: Mono color function which mixes the chroma
signals of the signal hue to the luminance
signal. The chroma level is modulated
according to the luminance signal.
COLOR CORRECTOR: Color cor rection function for a defined
hue range.
button is illuminated, the results of the CCU-
700A/ 700AP self-diagnosis are displayed on the
OUTPUT connector of the CCU-700A/ 700AP.
The results are also mixed with the video signal
output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector. Each
time you press this button, the status changes as
follows.
OFF ON (page 1) ON (page 2) ON (page n)
The contents of the self-diagnosis can be displayed when required
even if this button is not illuminated.
4 ) E C S /S h u tte r c o n tro l b lo c k
Press again and tur n off the illumination to set the camera to Shutter
mode.
(b) ON button
illuminated). The selected function is ON when this button is
illuminated.
(c) ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons and displays
window
In ECS mode(when the ECS button is illuminated): The
ECS
ON
ECS/SHUTTER
a
b c
99
pressed.
In Shutter mode(when the ECS button is not illuminated): The
denominator of the selected step shutter speed is
displayed in the window. Press to select the desired
shutter speed. The speed increases when the L(up)
button is pressed and decreases when the M(down)
button is pressed. It continuously changes while either
button remains pressed.
(a) ND (ND filter select) display
Indicates the number cor responding to the selected the ND filter.
1: Clear
2: 1/ 4 ND
3: 1/ 8 ND
4: 1/ 16 ND
5: 1/ 64 ND
Once either button is pressed, both buttons illuminate. Each time
you press the buttons, the ND filter setting changes as follows:
L: 123451...
M: 543215...
The filter setting changes when either button remains pressed.
(c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) display
Indicates the number cor responding to the selected CC filter.
A: Cross filter
B: 3200 K (clear)
C: 4300 K
D: 6300 K
E: 8000 K
(d) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons
you press the buttons, the CC filter setting changes as follows.
L: ABCDEA...
M: EDCBAE...
The filter setting changes while either button remains pressed.
N o te Once any of the (b) and (d) buttons has been pressed, all the four
buttons illuminate, enabling both the ND and CC filter selections.
6 ) M O N I T O R S E L E C T b u tto n s
Press to select the output signal from the WF1 OUTPUT connector
button is output.
SEQ: (sequential): When this button is pressed, you can monitor
the waveforms of the three R, G and B signals, in sequence,
on a monitor connected to the WF1 OUTPUT connector.
ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the SEQ circuits for
the WF1 OUTPUT are tur ned off and the ENC
signal is output from the WF1 OUTPUT
connector.
N o te The output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector is fixed to ENC.
7 ) C a m e ra n u m b e r/ta lly in d ic a tio n win d o w
displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera,
the number is displayed in black and the background of the number
illuminates in red. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera,
illuminates in green. When both the red and green tally signals are
sent simultaneously, the left half of the background illuminates in red
and the right half illuminates in green.
8 ) A L A R M in d ic a to r
Illuminates when a problem occurs in the camera system and the
self-diagnostic function activates at the camera or the CCU-
700A/ 700AP.
9 ) C A L L b u tto n
on the CCU-700A/ 700AP are illuminated if not already lit, or are
tur ned off if already illuminated. When the CALL button on the
camera is pressed, the call button on this panel illuminates and a
buzzer sounds.
Press and illuminate the button to permit this panel to control the
camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button
also illuminates.
1 1 ) P o we r a n d o u tp u t sig n a l se le c t b lo c k
camera ON.
camera ON. (The button flashes until the camera is ready for
transmission.) When you press this button again, it star ts flashing
and the power supply is tur ned off.
(b) Signal output select buttons
Press and illuminate one of these buttons to activate the test signal
generator of the camera and send the respective signals.
TEST: To send a sawtooth signal to test the video circuits.
BARS: To send a color bar signal.
N o te The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If the BARS
button is illuminated, press the button to tur n the illumination off before
pressing the TEST button.
1 2 ) A U T O S E T U P b lo c k
Press and illuminate these buttons to select the items to be adjusted
CC ND
a c b d
CAM PW TEST BARS
a b
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
LEVEL
AUTO SETUP
START/
BREAK WHITE BLACK
a b c d
10
100
automatically.
N o te If an er ror occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes.
1 3 ) M A S T E R G A I N b u tto n s a n d d isp la y win d o w
1 4 ) S c e n e file c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) SCENE (scene file number) display window
The file number selected with the scene file select buttons is
displayed.
(b) RECALL button
To recall a scene file, first specify the number of the desired file with
the scene file select buttons, then press this button. When the
specified file is cor rectly recalled, the RECALL button illuminates.
(c) Scene file select buttons
Press the L(up) or M(down) button to select the desired scene file.
When you press both the LandM buttons simultaneously, the
cur rent file number is displayed.
(d) STORE button
To store the cur rent setting in a scene file, first select the desired file
number with the scene file select buttons, then press this button.
STORE RECALL
SCENE
a
b
c
d
1 5 ) P a in t c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) CLEAR button
Press and hold this button for longer than one second to clear the
manually adjusted settings of the selected items and to continue with
the standard settings.
(b) Paint item indication window (LCD display)
The selected paint items illuminated are displayed. These displayed
items can be adjusted with their respective paint controls (rotar y
encoders).
(c) Paint controls (rotary encoders) and LED level markers
Adjust the items selected with the paint item select button. The LED
level markers illuminate to indicate the adjusted value of the
respective items. A marker to which no item is assigned is not
illuminated.
(d) Paint item select buttons
Press and illuminate the button cor responding to the paint items to
be adjusted. The selected items are displayed in the paint items
indication window.
WHITE (white balance adjustment): For R, G and B white
level adjustments.
BLACK (black balance adjustment): For R, G and B black
level adjustments.
GAMMA (gamma balance adjustment): For R, B and master
gamma level adjustments.
FLARE (flare balance adjustment): For R, G and B flare level
adjustments.
CLEAR
DETAIL SKIN
DTL-1
SKIN
DTL-2
BLK GAMMA
/SAT
MONO
COLOR
COLOR
CORRECTOR
WHITE BLACK GAMMA FLARE KNEE/
WHT CLIP
KNEE
POINT
KNEE
SLOPE
< W H I
G B R
T E >
a
b
c
d
< W h i
G B R
t e >
< B l a
G B R
c k >
< G a m
M B R
m a >
< F l a
G B R
r e >
101
KNEE/ WHT CLIP (master knee/ white clip adjustments):
For adjustments of the master knee point, master knee
slope and white clip.
KNEE POINT (Knee point adjustments): For R, G, and B
knee point adjustments.
KNEE SLOPE (Knee slope adjustments): For R, G, and B
knee slope adjustments.
DETAIL (detail adjustments): For adjustments of the detail
level, detail limiter and level dependence.
SKIN DTL-1 (skin detail adjustment 1): To adjust the skin
detail level with the left control.
SKIN DTL-2 (skin detail adjustment 2): For adjustments of
the phase, width and saturation of skin detail.
< M K
l S o p e l C i p o i n t P
n e e >
< K n o P i
G B R
n t e e >
< K n l S o
G B R
p e e e >
< D e t
i e p v l L L L D i m t
a i l >
< S k i n D e
e l e L v
t a i l - 1 >
< S k i n D e
s e W i d t h S a t h P a
t a i l - 2 >
BLK GAMMA/ SAT (black gamma/ saturation adjustments):
For adjustments of the saturation and black gamma.
MONO COLOR (mono color adjustments): For adjustments
of the saturation and hue of the chroma signal to be
mixed with the mono color function.
COLOR CORRECTOR (color corrector adjustments): For
adjustments for the color cor rector function. When you
press the button once, the amounts of phase
compensation (Hue) and the chroma compensation
(Saturation) of the color cor rector function can be
adjusted.
When you press the button twice, the center phase and the width of
the range of the color cor rector function can be adjusted.
N o te This color cor rector function is only available with the CCU-
700A/ 700AP when an optional BKP-7931(NTSC)/ 7311(PAL) Sub-encoder
Board is installed.
< r o o l C C e c t
S t a H u e
o r r >
CLOSE
RELATIVE
SENS
COARSE
CLOSE OPEN
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO CLOSE
EXT
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
8.0
11
15
22
IRIS
RELATIVE button
F-number display 1
CLOSE button 4
AUTO button 5
EXT indicator 6
SENS control knob 8
COARSE control knob 9
Master black control ring 10
IRIS control lever/preview switch 11
2
IRIS indicator 3
< K L B G a
G a m m a S a t
a m m >
< n o o M C r
H e u S a t
o l o >
< C o r r e c
s e W i d t h h P a
t A r e a >
10
102
1 ) F -n u m b e r d isp la y
Displays the f number of the cur rent iris setting. When the iris is
2 ) R E L AT I VE iris re la tive ) b u tto n
illuminate the button for relative mode, or press so that the
illumination is tur ned off for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/ MB
ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically
selected and this button is not operative.
3 ) I R I S in d ic a to r
The cor responding LED illuminates according to the iris setting.
When the RELATIVE button is not illuminated, the upper and lower
limits of manual adjustment are displayed here also, but at a lower
illumination level.
is enabled.
Lights when the lens extender is in use.
pressed, this button also illuminates.
Used for manual adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is not
operative when Relative mode is selected. See the table Iris
9 ) C O A R S E c o n tro l k n o b
functions.
Tur n to manually adjust the master black level.
manually by moving the lever. When the AUTO button is illuminated,
the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a
range of +/ -1f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect the key
signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the Iris
adjustment function.
COARSE control
SENS control
Relative mode
Adjusts the relative value of
the iris over 1/4 of the total
Sets the range of iris settings
over which the iris can operate.
Does not function.
Absolute mode
Adjust the iris within the
CLOSED.
Sets the upper limit for OPEN
according to CLOSED value
set by the COARSE control.
1 ) M A S T E R B L A C K R E L AT I VE b u tto n
illuminate the button for Relative mode, or press and tur n the
RELATIVE RELATIVE
PREVIEW
SENS
COARSE
CLOSE
IRIS
IRIS MASTER BLACK
OPEN
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO CLOSE
EXT
MASTER BLACK control
MASTER BLACK display 12
MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button 1
IRIS RELATIVE button 2
IRIS display 3
CLOSE button 4
AUTO button 5
EXT indicator 6
SENS control knob 8
IRIS control 10
Iris gauge 11
13
PREVIEW button 14
103
Functions the same as the RELATIVE button of the RCP-730. When
the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the iris adjustment mode
can be selected with this button. Press and illuminate the button for
Relative mode or press so that the illumination is tur ned off for
Absolute mode. When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button is not
illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is
not operative.
3 ) I R I S d isp la y
The items 4) through 9) are the same as those shown for the RCP-
730.
The iris control joystick lever (RCP-730)/ control knob (RCP-731)
controls the lens iris setting. When the AUTO button is not
illuminated, full manual control of iris is provided. When the AUTO
button is illuminated, the lens iris can be trimmed over +/ -2 f stops.
Depressing the joystick lever (RCP-730)/ preview button (RCP-731)
provides the camera preview signal at the preview output.
See the table Iris adjustment functions.
the IRIS control.
1 2 ) M A S T E R B L A C K d isp la y
Displays the cur rent master black setting over the range from -99 to
+99.
1 3 ) M A S T E R B L A C K c o n tro l
Manually adjust the master black level. The setting is displayed in
the MASTER BLACK display.
Connects to the RCP/ CNU connector of a CCU-700A/ 700AP or the
RCP connector of a CNU-700 with a CCA-5-36XX cable.
Connects to an RCP-700/ 701.
3 ) P R E VI E W c o n n e c to r 6 -p in )
Supplies preview signals. The RCP-731 receives the power from the
exter nal source, such as a video switcher, to illuminate the PREVIEW
button through this connector.
A d ju stin g th e L C D D isp la y
The RCP-730/ 731 is provided with LCD-display adjustment mode,
which permits you to adjust the brightness and contrast of the LCD
display of the paint control block.
1 ) To e n te r th e L C D -d isp la y a d ju stm e n t m o d e
While holding down the LOCK and PARA buttons, press the
WHITE button of the paint item select buttons. The LCD
display shows the following:
2 ) To a d ju st th e L C D d isp la y
Tur n the paint controls (rotar y encoders). You can adjust the
brightness with the control on the left and the contrast with
the control on the right.
3 ) To e x it th e L C D -d isp la y a d ju stm e n t m o d e
Press the LOCK and PARA buttons simultaneously.
N o te The values set in the LCD-display adjustment mode are stored in
memor y when the modes are canceled. Be sure to exit this mode before
tur ning off the power.
PREVIEW REMOTE
CCU/CNU AUX
1 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector
2 AUX REMOTE connector
3 PREVIEW connector
< D i s
C o n a r t s t r i g h t B
p l a y >
10
104
(l) RCP-720/721
LOCK
AUTO SETUP
PARA MASTER SLAVE
SKIN DTL
CLEAR
PAINT
LOCK
BLACK
GAMMA SATURATION
DETAIL
GATE
SKIN
DETAIL
SKIN DETAIL
KNEE POINT KNEE SAT KNEE SLOPE
SATURATION
B GAMMA R GAMMA M GAMMA
AUTO
KNEE
CHAR
ACTER
5600K
STANDARD
LEVEL START
ECS
ON
SCENE FILES STORE
WHITE
BLACK/FLARE
RELATIVE
SENS
COARSE
CLOSE OPEN
ALARM
CALL
AUTO
RELATIVE
IRIS MASTER BLACK
IRIS
IRIS
CLOSE
ECS/SHUTTER
ABSOLUTE
FLARE
DETAIL
LK GAMMA
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
PANEL
ACTIVE
MASTERGAIN
RCP-720
RCP-721
CC NO
EXT
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
SENS AUTO CLOSE
COARSE
CLOSE OPEN
RELATIVE
PREVIEW
RELATIVE
IRIS MASTER BLACK
EXT
STANDARD button
Control select block
Power and output signal select block
AUTO SETUP block
Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
Paint control block
Scene file control block
ECS/Shutter control block (left), Master gain control block (right)
White balance/black balance control block
Camera number/tally indication window
ALARM indicator
PANEL ACTIVE button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
CALL button 14
manual.
LOCK
a b c
PARA MASTER SLAVE
105
(a) LOCK button
Press and illuminate the button to disable controls except those in
the controls.
This button is illuminated when the Parallel mode is active, in which
this button is illuminated, all the buttons and controls on this panel
(except for the iris/ master black control block) are active, even if the
when it is illuminated, the light goes out and the Parallel mode is
canceled.
(c) MASTER and SLAVE
3 ) P o we r a n d o u tp u t sig n a l se le c t b lo c k
camera ON. The button flashes until the camera is ready for
transmission.
When you press this button again, it star ts flashing and the power
supply is tur ned off.
(b) Signal output select buttons
Press and illuminate one of these buttons to activate the camera test
signal generator and send the respective signals.
TEST: To send a sawtooth signal to test the video circuits.
BARS: To send a color bar signal.
N o te The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If the BARS
button is illuminated, press the button to tur n the illumination off before
pressing the TEST button.
a b
CAM PW TEST1 BARS
N o te If an er ror occurs during adjustment, the selected button flashes.
Various functions of the camera or the CCU-700A/ 700AP can be
tur ned on and off from this panel. The following switching functions
are assigned to seven of the buttons at the factor y, while the extreme
right-hand button is reser ved for future use. Press and illuminate
these buttons to tur n on the respective functions. Press again so that
the button is not illuminated to tur n off the function.
5600K: 5600K electronic color temperature conversion
function.
picture.
monitor screen.
SATURATION: Saturation function.
button is illuminated, the contents of the self-
diagnosis of the CCU-700A/ 700AP are displayed
on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER
OUTPUT connector or the CCU-700A/ 700AP.
The contents are also mixed with the video
signal to be output from the PIX1 OUTPUT
connector. Each time you press this button, the
status changes as follows.
OFF ON (page 1) ON (page 2) ON (page n)
The contents of the self-diagnosis may be displayed when required
even if this button is not illuminated.
a d c b
AUTO SETUP
LEVEL SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE WHITE BLACK
START/
BREAK
BLACK
GAMMA
SATURATION DETAIL
GATE
SKIN
DETAIL
AUTO
KNEE
CHAR
ACTER
5600K
10
106
(a) CLEAR button
Press and hold for longer than one second to clear the manually
adjusted settings of the selected items and continue with the
standard settings (which can be defined by the user).
(b) Paint controls (rotary encoders) and LED level markers
Adjust the items selected with the paint item select button. The LED
level markers illuminate to indicate the adjusted value of the
respective items. A marker to which no item is assigned does not
illuminate.
(c) Paint item select button and indicators
Press the button to illuminate the green indicator cor responding to
the paint items to be adjusted. The names of the selected items
illuminate in yellow and can be adjusted using the respective paint
controls (rotar y encoders).
SKIN DETAIL/ SATURATION: Adjust the detail level of the
skin tone with the left control and the saturation with the
right control
KNEE POINT/ KNEE SLOPE/ KNEE SAT: Adjust the knee
point, knee slope and knee saturation with these three
controls.
R GAMMA/ M GAMMA/ B GAMMA: Adjust the gamma
balance with these three controls
N o te When the cor responding paint function is not active, the yellow
indication of the item name does not illuminate and the item cannot be
controlled from this panel.
(d) PAINT LOCK button
Press and illuminate the button to disable paint control from this
panel. While this button is illuminated, only item switching with the
paint item select button is enabled.
7 ) S c e n e file c o n tro l b lo c k
can be retrieved by pressing and illuminating the button
with the desired number. Press the button to tur n the
illumination off and continue with the previous status.
(b) STORE button
number. When file registration is completed, the STORE button
illumination is tur ned off. To cancel the registration, press the
flashing button again before pressing the SCENE FILES button. The
STORE button is not illuminated.
8 ) E C S /S h u tte r c o n tro l b lo c k le ft)
Press again and tur n off the illumination to set the camera to Shutter
mode.
(b) ON button
illuminated). The function is ON when this button is illuminated.
(c) ECS frequency/shutter speed select buttons and display
window
pressed.
In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not illuminated):
The denominator of the selected step shutter speed is
displayed in the window. Press to select the desired
shutter speed. The speed increases when the L(up)
button is pressed and decreases when the M(down)
button is pressed. It continuously changes when either
button remains pressed.
(d) MASTER GAIN select buttons and display window
ND (ND filter select) display
Indicates the number cor responding to the selected ND filter.
1: Clear
a
b d c
CLEAR
PAINT
LOCK
SKIN DETAIL
KNEE POINT KNEE SAT KNEE SLOPE
SATURATION
B GAMMA R GAMMA M GAMMA
1 2 3 4 5
SCENE FILES STORE
a b
ECS
ON
ECS/SHUTTER MASTER GAIN
a
b d c
a d c b
CC ND
107
2: 1/ 4 ND
3: 1/ 8 ND
4: 1/ 16ND
5: 1:64 ND
you press the buttons, the ND filter setting changes as follows.
L: 123451...
M: 543215...
It continuously changes while either button remains pressed.
(c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) display
Indicates the number cor responding to the selected CC filter.
A: Cross filter
B: 3200 K (clear)
C: 4300 K
D: 6300 K
E: 8000 K
(d) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons
you press the buttons, the CC filter setting changes as follows.
L: ABCDEA...
M: EDCBAE...
It continuously changes while either button remains pressed.
N o te Once you press any of the (b) and (d) buttons, all the four buttons
illuminate, enabling both the ND and CC filter selections.
1 0 ) Wh ite b a la n c e /b la c k b a la n c e c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) ABSOLUTE button
Press and illuminate the button to change to the Absolute mode for
manual adjustment of the WHITE, BLACK, BLK GAMMA and
DETAIL controls. When this button is not illuminated, Relative mode
is automatically selected in the following cases.
* When an automatic setup is completed.
* When a scene file is retrieved.
When the PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated, or the PARA,
MASTER or SLAVE button is illuminated, Relative mode is always
selected and this button is not operative.
(b) WHITE (white balance manual adjustment) knobs
Used to manually adjust the white balance. From the left, the knobs
are for R, G, and B signal adjustment.
(c) BLACK/FLARE (black balance/flare balance manual adjustment)
knobs
Used to manually adjust the black balance (when the FLARE button
is not illuminated) or the flare balance (when the FLARE button is
illuminated). From the left, the knobs are for R, G, and B signal
adjustment.
(d) BLK GAMMA (black gamma) adjustment knob
Tur n to adjust the black gamma.
(e) DETAIL adjustment knob
Tur n to adjust the detail level.
(f) FLARE button
Toggles the black balance adjustment mode and flare balance
adjustment mode for the BLACK/ FLARE knobs. Press and
illuminate the button to select the flare balance adjustment mode.
Press the button again so that it is not illuminated to adjust the black
balance.
displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera,
illuminates in red. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera,
illuminates in green. When both the red and green tally signals are
sent simultaneously, the left half of the background illuminates in red
and the right half illuminates in green.
Illuminates when a problem occurs in the camera system and the
self-diagnostic function activates at the camera or the CCU-
700A/ 700AP.
also illuminates.
on the CCU-700A/ 700AP illuminate if not lit, or are tur ned off if they
were already illuminated. When the CALL button on the camera is
pressed, the CALL button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer
sounds.
a
b
c
d
e
f
WHITE
BLACK/FLARE
ABSOLUTE
FLARE
DETAIL
BLK GAMMA
10
108
EXT
RELATIVE
SENS
CLOSE OPEN
AUTO
RELATIVE
IRIS MASTER BLACK
IRIS
CLOSE
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
MASTER BLACK display
IRIS display 4
EXT indicator 7
CLOSE button 5
AUTO button 6
SENS control knob 9
1
COARSE
1 ) M A S T E R B L A C K d isp la y
Displays the cur rent master black setting in the range from -99 to
+99.
2 ) M A S T E R B L A C K R E L AT I VE b u tto n
illuminate the button for Relative mode, or press and tur n the
illuminate the button for Relative mode or press so that it is not
illuminated for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/ MB ACTIVE button
is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this
button is not operative.
4 ) I R I S d isp la y
is enabled.
pressed, this button is also illuminated.
Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is
not operative when Relative mode is selected. See the table Iris
1 0 ) C O A R S E c o n tro l k n o b
functions.
Tur n to manually adjust the master black level. The setting is
displayed in the MASTER BLACK display.
manually by moving the lever. When the AUTO button is illuminated,
the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a
range or +/ -1f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect the key
signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the table Iris
COARSE control
SENS control
Relative mode
Adjusts the iris with relative
values within 1/4 of the total
Adjust the total from the OPEN
to CLOSED in relative values.
Does not function.
Absolute mode
Adjust the iris within the
CLOSED.
Sets the upper limit for OPEN
according to the CLOSED value
set by the COARSE control.
109
The items 1) through 10) are the same as those shown for the RCP-
720.
manually by tur ning the control. When the AUTO button is
set in a range of +/ -1f stop with this control. See the table Iris
the IRIS control.
Tur n to manually adjust the master black level. The setting is
displayed in the MASTER BLACK display.
Connect to the RCP/ CNU connector of the CCU-700/ 700AP or the
RCP connector of the CNU-700.
Connect to the RCP-700/ 701.
Supplies preview signals. The RCP-721 receives the power from an
exter nal device, such as a video switcher, to illuminate the PREVIEW
EXT
RELATIVE
SENS
CLOSE OPEN
RELATIVE
IRIS MASTER BLACK
IRIS
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO CLOSE
COARSE
PREVIEW
EXT
MASTER BLACK display
IRIS display 4
EXT indicator 7
MASTER BLACK control 13
CLOSE button
1
PREVIEW button 14
AUTO button 6
SENS control knob 9
IRIS control 11
Iris gauge 12
5
CCU/CNU REMOTE connector 1
AUX REMOTE connector 2
PREVIEW connector 3
REMOTE PREVIEW
CCU/CNU AUX
10
110
(m) RCP-700/701
O p e ra tio n a l P a n e l
EXT
EXT
IRIS
MASTER SLAVE
BLACK
BLACK
CALL
WHITE
WHITE
PANEL
ACTIVE
ALARM
COARSE
SENS
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO
OPEN
IRIS
MASTER BLACK
MASTER SLAVE
BLACK
BLACK
CALL
WHITE
WHITE
PANEL
ACTIVE
ALARM
PREVIEW
COARSE
SENS
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
RCP-700
PANEL ACTIVE button 1
AUTO button 12
Camera number/
tally indication window
13
WHITE button 2
BLACK button 3
CALL button 4
WHITE knobs 5
BLACK knobs 6
EXT indicator 7
SENS control knob 9
ALARM indicator 11
RCP-701
PANEL ACTIVE button 1
AUTO button 12
MASTER BLACK control 14
Camera number/
tally indication window
13
IRIS control 15
Iris gauge 16
PREVIEW button 17
WHITE button 2
BLACK button 3
CALL button 4
WHITE knobs 5
BLACK knobs 6
EXT indicator 7
SENS control knob 9
ALARM indicator 11
P a rts c o m m o n to th e R C P -7 0 0 /7 0 1
Items 1) through 13) are common to the RCP-700 and RCP-701.
1 ) P A N E L A C T I VE b u tto n
also illuminates.
2 ) WH I T E wh ite b a la n c e ) b u tto n
111
N o te If an er ror occurs during adjustment, the selected button flashes.
3 ) B L A C K b la c k b a la n c e ) b u tto n
N o te If an er ror during adjustment, the pressed button flashes.
4 ) C A L L b u tto n
on the CCU-700/ A700AP are illuminated if they were not lit, or are
tur ned off if they were already illuminated. When the CALL button
on the camera is pressed, the CALL button on this panel illuminates
and a buzzer sounds.
5 ) WH I T E wh ite b a la n c e m a n u a l a d ju stm e n t) k n o b s
Used to manually adjust the white balance. Adjust the R and B
signals, respectively.
6 ) B L A C K b la c k b a la n c e m a n u a l a d ju stm e n t) k n o b s
Used to manually adjust the black balance. Adjust the R and B
signals, respectively.
pressed, this button also illuminates.
functions.
1 0 ) C O A R S E c o n tro l k n o b
functions.
Lights when a problem occurs in the camera system and the self-
diagnostic function is activated at the camera or the CCU-
700A/ 700AP.
1 2 ) A U T O b u tto n
is enabled.
in c o rp o ra te d with M A S T E R /S L AVE in d ic a tio n s)
green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in
black against a green background. When the red and green tally
signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background is
illuminated red and the right half illuminated green. In Master/ Slave
mode, to adjust the white balance of multiple cameras the upper-left
(MASTER) cor ner is illuminated orange when the camera being
controlled from this panel is designated as the master unit, and the
upper-right (SLAVE) cor ner is illuminated orange when designated
as a slave unit.
R C P -7 0 0 -e x c lu sive fe a tu re s
Tur n to manually adjust the master black.
manually by moving this lever. When the AUTO button is
set in a range of +/ -1f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect
the key signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the table
Iris adjustment functions.
R C P -7 0 1 -e x c lu sive fe a tu re s
Tur n to manually adjust the master black.
manually by tur ning the control. When the AUTO button is
set in a range of +/ -1f stop with this control. See the table Iris
control. Tur n the gauge to set the line to the most frequency used
the IRIS control.
Supplies preview in. The RCP-701 receives the power from an
exter nal source, such as a video switcher, to illuminate the PREVIEW
2 ) R E M O T E c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connect to the RCP/ CNU connector of a CCU-700A/ 700AP, the RCP
connector of a CNU-700 or the AUX connector of another RCP Series
Remote Control Panel.
COARSE control
SENS control
Adjust the iris within the variable controls.
Sets the lower limit for CLOSED.
Sets the upper limit for OPEN according to the CLOSED
value set by the COARSE control.
PREVIEW REMOTE
PREVIEW connector 1
REMOTE connector 2
10
112
(n) RM-B150
1 ) S h u tte r c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) SHUTTER button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to Shutter mode.
The cur rent shutter speed is shown on the display of the menu
operation block for a few seconds. In Shutter mode, the shutter
speed is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotar y encoder).
(b) ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to ECS mode. The
cur rent ECS frequency is shown on the display of the menu
operation block for a few seconds. In ECS mode, the ECS frequency
is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotar y encoder).
(c) S-EVS (Super EVS) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to S-EVS mode.
The cur rent S-EVS value is shown on the display of the menu
operation block for a few seconds. In S-EVS mode, the S-EVS value is
adjusted with the menu select knob (rotar y encoder).
N o te s
* When you change the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value in the
Shutter control block 1
SHUTTER ECS
SELECT DISPLAY
ON
OFF
MENU
CANCEL ENTER
S-EVS
REW
STOP
F FWD
VTR
GAIN OUTPUT FILTER
KNEE
WHITE
MENU
M GAMMA DETAIL
PLAY REC REVIEW
START/STOP
CAM
BARS
TEST
LOW
MID
HIGH
1 2 3 4 5 A B C D E
ND
AUTO
KNEE
R B
CC
BLACK
MASTER
BLACK
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-B150
R B
A
B PRE
AWB
ABB
AUTO
EXT
IRIS
ACTIVE STANDARD
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
Filter control block 2
Paint control block 3
White balance control block 4
Black balance control block 5
ACTIVE button 6
STANDARD button 7
Iris/master black control block 8
VTR control block 9
OUTPUT selector 10
GAIN selector 11
MENU operation block 12
SHUTTER ECS S-EVS
a b c
113
cor responding mode, the menu block display shows it for a few seconds.
* When this unit is in RM Configuration Menu mode, the shutter speed,
ECS frequency and S-EVS value cannot be adjusted.
(a) ND (ND filter) indicators
The indicator cor responding to the cur rently selected ND filter
illuminates.
(b) ND (ND filter select) button
Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit (Filter camera
control mode) to enable filter selection from this unit. When this
button is illuminated, the ND filter cyclically changes in the sequence
of 123451... each time it is pressed.
(c) CC (color temperature conversion filter) indicators
The indicator that cor responds to the cur rently selected CC filter is
illuminated.
(d) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) button
Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit (Filter camera
control mode) to enable filter selection from this unit. When this
button is illuminated, the CC filter cyclically changes in the sequence
of ABCDEA... each time it is pressed.
N o te s
* Once you press any of the filter select buttons, both buttons illuminate.
The illumination is switched off when filter selection is made on the
camera.
* The choice of filters that can be selected depends on the camera being
used. For available filters, refer to the Operation Manual of the camera.
* For a camera with four filters, you can change the function of this button
to skip 5 or E and switch from 4 to1 or from D to A using the RM
Configuration menu. However, when the connected camera has an
automatic filter-detection facility, setting with the RM Configuration menu
is not required. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu.
(a)AUTO KNEE button (amber illumination)
This button is specified at the factor y to tur n the auto knee function
on and off. Press and illuminate the button to tur n the auto knee
function on. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to
change the function that is tur ned on/ off with this button
(b) KNEE control
The control is specified at the factor y to adjust the master knee point.
However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the
function that is adjusted with this control.
(c) M GAMMA (master gamma) control
The control is specified at the factor y to adjust the master gamma.
(d) DETAIL control
The control is specified at the factor y to adjust the detail level.
N o te The adjustment mode of the above three controls is specified at the
factor y as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the
RM Configuration menu. The center click position of each control is the
reference position in Relative mode. The adjustment range in Relative mode
is also selected using the menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration
Menu.
4 ) Wh ite b a la n c e c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) WHITE (white balance) controls
Adjusts the R/ B white balance. The adjustment mode of these
controls is specified at the factor y as Relative mode, which can be
changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu. See
Settings on the RM Configuration Menu.
(b) A (memory A) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to obtain the white balance setting
stored in memor y A of the camera (Memor y A mode). When this
button is illuminated, adjustments made to the white balance are
stored in memor y A. Press the button again to release Memor y A
mode.
(c) B (memory B) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to obtain the white balance setting
stored in memor y B of the camera (Memor y B mode). When this
button is illuminated, adjustments made to the white balance are
stored in memor y B. Press the button again to release Memor y B
mode.
(d) AWB (auto white balance) button (red illumination)
is illuminated during adjustment and this is tur ned off when
adjustment is complete. If you press the button while it is
illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button
(e) PRE (preset) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to fix the white balance to 3200K
(Preset mode). Press the button again to release Preset mode.
N o te In Preset mode, manual adjustment with the WHITE controls and
automatic adjustment with the AWB button are both disabled.
When the adjustment mode of the WHITE controls is specified as Absolute
mode, the Memor y A, B and AWB buttons are disabled.
1 2 3 4 5 A B C D E
FILTER
ND CC
a
b
c
d
a b d c
KNEE M GAMMA DETAIL
AUTO
KNEE
WHITE R B
a b c d e
A
B PRE
AWB
10
114
5 ) B la c k b a la n c e c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) BLACK (black balance) controls
These controls are specified at the factor y to adjust the R/ B black
balance. Using the RM Configuration menu, you can change the
function of these controls to adjust the R/ B flare balance. The
adjustment mode of these controls is specified at the factor y as
Relative mode, which can also be changed to Absolute mode using
the menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu.
(b) ABB (auto black balance) button (red illumination)
button is illuminated during adjustment and this is tur ned off when
adjustment is completed. If you press this button when it is
illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled, and the button
flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again.
N o te When the adjustment mode of the BLACK controls is specified as
Absolute mode, automatic black balance adjustment with the ABB button is
disabled.
6 ) A C T I VE b u tto n g re e n illu m in a tio n )
Press to select the control mode for the connected camera system.
Each time you press the button with the factor y setting, the control
mode cyclically switches between FULL, PART, and LOCK modes.
FULL mode: All controls from this unit are enabled (panel
active status). Both this button and the IRIS/ MB
ACTIVE indicator in the iris/ master black control
block are illuminated.
PART mode: Controls only from the iris/ master black control
block are enabled (iris/ master black active
status). This button is not illuminated, but the
IRIS/ MB ACTIVE indicator stays lit.
LOCK mode: All controls from this unit are disabled (lock
status). Neither this button nor the IRIS/ MB
ACTIVE indicator in the iris/ master black control
are illuminated.
Using the RM Configuration menu, the function of this button can be
changed to switch only between FULL and LOCK modes. The RM
Configuration menu operation is possible in any mode. See Settings
on the RM Configuration Menu.
7 ) S TA N D A R D b u tto n g re e n illu m in a tio n )
manual.
BLACK R B
ABB
a b
8 ) I ris/m a ste r b la c k c o n tro l b lo c k
(a) MASTER BLACK control
Manually adjusts the master black level. The adjustment mode of this
control is specified at the factor y as Absolute mode, which can be
changed to Relative mode using the RM Configuration menu. See
(b) EXT (lens extender) indicator (amber illumination)
(c) AUTO button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to automatically adjust the iris
according to the amount of input light. If you press the button when
it is illuminated, this is tur ned off and manual iris adjustment is
enabled.
(d) IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) indicator (green
illumination)
Illuminated when the control mode is set as FULL or PART mode
with the ACTIVE button. When this indicator is illuminated,
iris/ master black controls from this unit are enabled.
(e) IRIS control
manually by tur ning this control. When the AUTO button is
illuminated, you can fine-adjust the reference value for automatic iris
adjustment in a range of +/ -2 f stops with this control. The
adjustment mode of this control is specified at the factor y as
Absolute mode, which can also be changed to Relative mode using
the RM Configuration menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration
Menu.
(f) Iris gauge
Tur n the gauge to set the white line to the most frequency used iris
position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris
adjustment.
9 ) VT R c o n tro l b lo c k
Controls VTR operations.
(a) REW (rewind) button (amber illumination): Press
this button to star t a rewind operation. The button is
MASTER
BLACK
AUTO
EXT
IRIS
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
a b c d
e
f
REW
STOP
F FWD
VTR
PLAY REC REVIEW
START/STOP
a b c
d e f
MM
115
illuminated.
(b) F FWD (fast forward) button (amber illumination):
Press this button to star t a fast-for ward operation. The
button is illuminated.
(c) START/ STOP button (red illumination): Press this
button to star t a recording operation. The button is
illuminated. Pressing this button when it is illuminated
stops the VTR recording.
(d) STOP button: Press to stop a rewind, fast-for ward or
playback operation.
(e) PLAY button (amber illumination): Press button to
star t a playback operation. The button is illuminated.
(f) REC REVIEW (recording review) button (amber
illumination):Press this button to execute a recording
review operation. The button is illuminated.
N o te s
* When the START/ STOP button is illuminated, the other buttons in the
VTR control block are deactivated. To activate the other buttons, first
press the START/ STOP button to cancel the Recording mode.
* Some of the VTR control functions of this unit may be disabled depending
on the combination of camera and VTR. For details, ask your official Sony
representative.
1 0 ) O U T P U T se le c to r
Selects the output signal from the connected camera.
CAM: Picture output
BARS: Color bar signal
TEST: Test signals for a video circuit check (the signal is
selected using the RM Configuration Menu). See
1 1 ) G A I N m a ste r g a in ) se le c to r
Selects the video gain from three values (LOW, MID, HIGH)
according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. Normally,
these three gain settings are those chosen in the camera set-up.
Alter native gain settings may be defined by using the configuration
menu of the RM-B150 Operation Panel. See Settings on the RM
Configuration Menu.
1 2 ) M E N U o p e ra tio n b lo c k
(a) Menu display (8 columns)
In normal operation mode, the display illuminates to show the
shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value only when the shutter
control block is operated. When you select the RM Configuration
menu, the display shows menu items, set values, and various
information depending on operations.
(b) RM Configuration switch
Selects the RM Configuration menu. When this switch is pushed in
the M direction, the Basic menu is selected.
MM
I
M
a b
c d e
SELECT DISPLAY
ON
OFF
MENU
CANCEL ENTER
MENU
When this switch is pushed in the M direction, while holding the
CANCEL/ ENTER switch at ENTER, the Detail menu is selected.
The RM Configuration menu is switched off by pushing this switch
in the L direction.
(c) DISPLAY switch
For control of the cameras menu.
ON: Shows the character display function of the camera.
OFF: Shows the character display function of the camera.
MENU: Sets the camera into the camera menu mode.
(d) CANCEL/ENTER switch
To register or cancel a menu item or value selection.
(e) Menu select knob (rotary encoder)
In normal operation, the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS
value can be adjusted with this knob. In the cameras menu mode,
the knob is used for camera menu operations. On the RM
Configuration menu, tur n the knob to select menu categories,
subcategories, set items, set values and other information on the
menu display.
For operations on the RM Configuration menu, see Settings on the
RM Configuration Menu. For operations on the cameras menu,
refer to the Operation Manual of the camera or the System Manual.
Note that menu mode may not be operable on some cameras. For
details, ask your Sony dealer.
1 ) C A M E R A c o n n e c to r 8 -p in )
Connect to the camera using the supplied remote cable.
2 ) M O N I T O R c o n n e c to r B N C )
Connect to a color monitor to obser ve the signal from the camera.
S e ttin g s o n th e R M C o n fig u ra tio n M e n u
The RM-B150 is provided with an RM Configuration Menu mode.
This enables you to select and adjust the function of the buttons and
CAMERA MONITOR
CAMERA connector 1
MONITOR connector 2
10
116
controls on the panel and to check various information. At the
beginning of an RM Configuration menu operation, select Basic
menu or Detail menu and proceed with operations as desired.
O p e ra tio n
For menu operations, use the menu operation block of the unit (see
the page to the left).
To start the menu operation
To se le c t th e B a sic m e n u
Push the RM Configuration switch in the Mdirection. The menu
display shows Cbl Comp (the first categor y of the Basic menu).
To se le c t th e D e ta il m e n u
Push the RM Configuration switch in the Mdirection while holding
the CANCEL/ ENTER switch toward ENTER. The menu display
shows Mode Set (the first categor y of the Detail menu).
N o te The RM Diag categor y of the Detail menu is used to display various
information, to check operations and reset the menu. For items for
which the operation procedure differs, the procedure is discussed
in the cor responding Contents column.
To m a k e se ttin g s o n th e m e n u
1 Tur n the menu select knob until the required categor y
appears on the display.
Example: Mode Set...VR Setup
2 Push the CANCEL/ ENTER switch toward ENTER to register
your selection made in step 1. The first subcategor y of the
selected categor y appears.
Example: Knee
If there is no subcategor y belonging to the selected categor y,
the first setting (or display) item of that categor y appears on
the display (proceed to step 5).
3 Tur n the menu select knob until the desired subcategor y
appears on the display.
Example: Knee...Iris
your selection made in step 3. (Pushing toward CANCEL
reverses the operation.) The first setting item of the selected
subcategor y and its cur rent setting appear.
Example: Ctrl : Abs
5 Tur n the menu select knob until the desired setting (or
display) item appears on the display.
Example: Ctrl : Abs...Min : Cls
For a setting item, make your setting.
your setting made in step 5.
7 Tur n the menu select knob until the desired categor y appears
on the display.
Example: Min : Cls...Min : 22
your setting made in step 7. (Pushing toward CANCEL
cancels the setting in step 7.)
To continue setting items, repeat steps 5 to 8.
To e n d th e m e n u o p e ra tio n
Push the RM Configuration switch in the Ldirection.
N o te s
* If an operation has not been made in Menu mode after one minute, the
menu automatically exits.
* Values set on the RM Configuration menu are stored in memor y when you
exit the menu operation. Be sure to exit the operation before tur ning the
power off.
B a sic M e n u (An underlined item under Setting indicates the factory setting.)
Category Subcategory Item Setting Contents
Cbl Comp Len 10m, 50m, 100m Sets the cable length for the
cable compensation circuit
Bright LED 10 to 99 (50) Sets the brightness of the
LEDs on the control panel
Disp 10 to 99 (50) Sets the brightness of the
menu display
Buzzer Lvl 0 to 99 (50) Sets the sound volume of
the buzzer
Out On, Off Turns buzzer output on and
off
117
Mode Set
Gain SW
SW Setup
VR Setup
Category
Knee
M Gamma
Detail
White
Black
Subcategory
Act
FltMax
L (RM)
M (RM)
H (RM)
Mode
AtKnee
Test
Item
Ctrl
Scal
Item
Ctrl
Scal
Item
Ctrl
Scal
Ctrl
Scal
Item
Ctrl
Scal
Item
Md2, Md3
4, 5
[-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, .....42
[-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, .....42
[-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, .....42
RM, CAM
AtKnee, KneeSat
BikGamma, SkinDtl
1, 2, 3
Knee, Slope, Knee Sat,
M-VHS, M Gamma,
BikGamma, Detail,
SkinDtl
Rel, Abs
1/1, 1/2, 1/4
M-VHS, M Gamma,
BikGamma, Detail,
SkinDtl
Rel, Abs
1/1, 1/2, 1/4
M-VHS, M Gamma,
BikGamma, Detail,
SkinDtl
Rel, Abs
1/1, 1/2, 1/4
Rel, Abs
1/1, 1/2, 1/4
Black, Flare
Rel, Abs
1/1, 1/2, 1/4
Setting
Selects the control mode.
Md2: Each time the ACTIVE button is pressed, FULL and LOCK are toggled.
Md3: Each time the ACTIVE button is pressed, FULL,
PART and LOCK are cyclically switched.
Sets the default numbers of the ND and CC filters.
However, when the connected camera has an automatic filter detection facility,
setting this item is not required.
Selects the gain value for GAIN selector position LOW in Gain Local mode (in 3 dB
steps to 42 dB max.) *1
Selects the gain value for GAIN selector position MID in Gain Local mode (in 3 dB
steps to 42 dB max).*1
Selects the gain value for GAIN selector position HIGH in Gain Local mode (in 3 dB
steps to 42 dB max.) *1
Selects the Gain Local/Remote mode.
RM: Gain Local mode (The gain is controlled according to the settings on this unit
regardless of the GAIN L/M/H settings on the camera.)
CAM: Gain Remote mode (The gain is controlled according to the GAIN L/M/H
settings on the camera. Effective only with a camera equipped with an
automatic detection facility.)
Selects the function of the AUTO KNEE button.
AtKnee: Turns the Auto Knee saturation function on and off (on when lit).
KneeSat: Turns the Knee function on and off (on when lit).
BlkGamma: Turns the Black Gamma function on and off (on SkinDtl: Turns the Skin
detail function on and off (on when lit).
Selects the output signal when the OUTPUT selector is set
to the TEST position.
1: Gamma-waveform signal
2: Three-value staircase signal
3: Ten-value staircase signal
Item: Selects the function of the control knobs.
Knee: Master knee point adjustment
Slope: Knee slope adjustment
Knee Sat: Knee saturation adjustment
M-VHS: Master V modulation shading adjustment
M Gamma: Master gamma adjustment
BlkGamma: Black gamma adjustment
Deail: Detail adjustment
SkinDtl: Skin detail adjustment
Ctrl: Selects the adjustment mode of the control knobs.
Rel: Relative mode
Abs: Absolute mode
Scal: Selects the adjustment range of the control knobs in Relative mode. The
adjustment range is set as a fraction of the entire variable range.
Selects the adjustment mode of the WHITE control knobs.
Rel: Relative mode, Abs: Absolute mode
Selects the adjustment range of the WHITE control knobs in Relative mode. The
adjustment range is set as a fraction of entire variable range.
Selects the function of the BLACK control knobs.
Black: Black balance adjustment
Flare: Flare balance adjustment
Selects the adjustment mode of the BLACK control knobs.
Selects the adjustment range of the BLACK control knobs in Relative mode. The
adjustment range is set as a fraction of entire variable range.
Contents
D e ta il M e n u (An Underlined item under Setting indicates the factory setting.)
10
118
RM Diag
M Black
Iris
System
DIP SW
Pnl Test
Version
Preset
Item
Scal
Ctrl
Scal
Min
Max
Mode
COM
Obj
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
ALLReset
Rel, Abs
1/1, 1/2, 1/4
Rel, Abs
1/1, 1/2, 1/4
Cls, 22 to 1.0
Cls, 22 to 1.0 (1.4)
RM, CAM
OK, Sens, Open
...., CHU, CCU, CNU
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
Selects the adjustment mode of the M BLACK control knob.
Selects the adjustment range of the M BLACK control knobs in Relative mode. The
adjustment range is set as a fraction of the entire variable range.
Selects the adjustment mode of the IRIS control.
Selects the adjustment range of the IRIS control in relative mode. The adjustment
range is set as a function of the entire variable range.
Sets the minimum adjustment value (f) in Absolute mode.
Sets the maximum adjustment value (f) in Absolute mode.
Selects the variable range mode in Absolute mode.
RM: The iris is adjusted within the min. and max. values set on this menu.
CAM: The iris is automatically adjusted according to the iris file data of the camera.
(effective only with a camera equipped with an automatic detection facility)
Shows the communication status of the command port (CAMERA connector).
OK: Normal
Sens: Communication is not possible.
Open: No connector connected.
Shoes the connected device.
....: None
CHU: Camera head
CCU: Camera control unit
CNU: Camera network unit
Shows DIP switch S1-1 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1)
Executes the panel test.
To set the unit in Test mode, push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER with
this subcategory selected (Pnl Test displayed).
In Test mode, the test of switches, LEDs and volumes can be made.
To release Test mode, push the RM Configuration switch in the direction while
holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch at ENTER.
Displays the version information.
To display the information, push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER with
this subcategory selected (Version displayed).
The ROM version of this unit is displayed (The display can be scrolled with the
menu select knob).
To cancel the version display, push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards CANCEL.
Returns (resets) all the settings made by the RM Configuration menu to the factory
settings.
Operating procedure:
1. Push the RM Configuration switch in the direction with this subcategory
selected (All Reset displayed) while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch at
ENTER. All Reset flashes on the display.
2. Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER .OK flashes on the display.
3. Push again the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER.
4. Reset is executed.
5. When reset is completed, Complete appears for several seconds. By pushing the
CANCEL/ENTER switch towards CANCEL in step 3, the reset operation can be
canceled.
Category Subcategory Item Setting Contents

(An Underlined item under Setting indicates the factory setting.)
*1 Which value may be selected depends on the camera being used.
119
(o) BVF-7700/7700P
A p p e a ra n c e
PEAKING
POWER
ON
R
G
R
R
G
R
OFF
ON
OFF
NORMAL
SCAN SIZE
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
NARROW
12 Up-tally lamp
13 Camera connector
7 Lift-lock release knob
8 POWER/DEGAUSS switch 10 SCAN SIZE switch
1 Tilt knob
2 PEAKING control 5 BRIGHT control
3 PEAKING switch 6 Tilt lock lever 4 Red tally lamps
9 Green tally lamps 11 CONTRAST control
10
120
1 ) T ilt k n o b
Adjust for the desired tilt friction.
2 ) P E A K I N G c o n tro l
Enhances the edge sharpness of the displayed image when the
PEAKING switch 3) is set to ON. The adjustable range is from 0 dB
to more than 15 dB. This control has no effect on the video output
signal from the camera.
3 ) P E A K I N G switc h
ON: The PEAKING control 2) is activated and the edge
sharpness of the picture can be enhanced.
OFF: The PEAKING control is deactivated. The peaking control
can be tur ned off with a control signal sent from the
camera even if the PEAKING switch is set to ON.
4 ) R e d ta lly la m p s
Illuminate when the camera accepts a red tally signal. The brightness
of these lamps is adjustable with an inter nal control.
5 ) B R I G H T c o n tro l
Adjusts the picture brightness. This control has no effect on the
video output signal from the camera.
6 ) T ilt lo c k le ve r
Pushing the lever for ward toward the lens locks the viewfinder.
Moving it back toward the camera operator allows the tilt friction to
be adjusted with the tilt knob 1).
7 ) L ift-lo c k re le a se k n o b
Releases the lock on the viewfinder position. Pull the knob and the
lock is released so that the viewfinder position can be raised to the
middle or top position from the factor y-set standard position.
8 ) P O WE R /D E G A U S S switc h
OFF (lower): The power supply to the viewfinder is tur ned off.
ON (center): The power supply to the viewfinder is tur ned on.
DEGAUSS (upper): When an exter nal magnetic field affects
color reproduction, keep the switch at this
position until the cor rect color is obtained.
This takes about one second.
9 ) G re e n ta lly la m p s
Illuminate when the camera accepts a green tally signal. The
brightness of these lamps is adjustable with an inter nal control.
1 0 ) S C A N S I Z E switc h
NORMAL: The screen size is normal. Generally use this
position.
NARROW: The screen size is reduced by 80 %of the normal
size. Use this position when monitoring a picture at a
distance from the viewfinder when the optional
outdoor hood is attached.
The function of this switch is changed by a control signal from the
camera or by setting the inter nal switch appropriately. The aspect
ratio can be changed to 4:3 or 16:9 with this switch.
1 1 ) C O N T R A S T c o n tro l
Adjusts the picture contrast. This control has no effect on the video
output signal from the camera.
1 2 ) U p -ta lly la m p
Functions the same as the red tally lamps 4). To deactivate this lamp,
set the UP TALLY switch on the camera to OFF.
* To adjust the brightness of the up-tally lamp, refer to the
operation manual provided with the camera.
* To display the camera number, attach one of the supplied plates,
numbered from 0 through 9.
1 3 ) C a m e ra c o n n e c to r D -su b 2 5 -p in )
Connects to the viewfinder connector on the camera.
60
40
30
30
Lift-lock release knob
Middle position Upper position
A d ju stin g th e A n g le o f th e Vie wfin d e r
You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder so that you can see the
screen comfor tably.
T iltin g th e vie wfin d e r
The range of adjustment can be changed by altering the position
of the lift-lock release knob.
121
(p) BVF-77/77CE
A p p e a ra n c e
PEAKING
POWER
ON
R
G
R
R
G
R
OFF
ON
OFF
NORMAL
SCAN SIZE
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
NARROW
12 Up-tally lamp
6
5
4 Lift-lock release knob
3
2
1
POWER switch
CONTRAST control
SCAN SIZE switch
Green tally lamps
PEAKING control 7
PEAKING selector
Tilt knob
Red tally lamps
8 BRIGHT control
Tilt lock lever 9
10
11
1 ) P E A K I N G c o n tro l
Used for control compensation (peaking) of the picture when the
PEAKING selector is set to ON. Compensation increases as the
control is tur ned clockwise. The compensation ranges from 0 to
more than 15 dB.
2 ) P E A K I N G se le c to r
Allows control compensation with the PEAKING control when this
selector is set to ON. When it is set to OFF, the PEAKING control
10
122
does not function, and compensation is equivalent to 0 dB.
3 ) T ilt k n o b
Adjusts the tilt function.
4 ) L ift-lo c k re le a se k n o b
Allows the viewfinder to be raised from the standard factor y preset
position (the lower position) to the middle or top position (the angle
of the viewfinder is only adjustable at these positions). Adjust the
height of the viewfinder while pulling the release knob.
5 ) P O WE R switc h
ON: The power of the viewfinder is tur ned on. (Normal position)
OFF: The power of the viewfinder is tur ned off.
6 ) G re e n ta lly la m p s
These illuminate when the camera receives a green tally signal. The
7 ) R e d ta lly la m p s
These illuminate when the camera receives a red tally signal. The
8 ) B R I G H T c o n tro l
Used to adjust the picture brightness. This controls has no effect on
the video output signal from the camera.
9 ) T ilt lo c k le ve r
Pushing the lever for ward toward the lens locks the viewfinder.
Moving it back toward the camera operator allows the tilt friction to
be adjusted with the tilt knob 3).
1 0 ) C O N T R A S T c o n tro l
Adjusts the picture contrast.
1 1 ) S C A N S I Z E switc h
NORMAL: The screen size is normal.
NARROW: The screen size is 80 %of normal.
1 2 ) U p -ta lly la m p
Functions the same as the red tally lamps on the viewfinder screen.
This lamp does not illuminate when the UP TALLY switch on the
camera is set to OFF.
* To adjust the brightness of this lamp, refer to the manual for the
camera.
* One of the supplied number plates (0 through 9) can be attached
to this lamp.
25
25
60
40
Tilt knob
Tilt lock lever
The angle of the viewfinder is adjustable for comfor table viewing.
123
(q) BVF-55/55CE
A p p e a ra n c e
R TALLY lamp (red)
Lights w hen the red tally signal is input.
G TALLY lamp (green)
Lights w hen the green tally signal is input.
Up-tally lamp (red)
Set U P TA LLY sw itch to O N . The lam p lights
in the sam e w ay as the R tally lam p.
The supplied num ber plate can be attached to
this.
Tilt lock lever
Fixes any tilting position.
12-pin connector
C onnects to a video cam era's VF connector,
using the supplied connecting cable.
Pow er and video/tally signals are supplied
through this connector.
Center marker V control
A djusts the vertical position of the center
m arker w ithin 5% of the screen size.
down up
V
Center marker H control
A djusts the holizontal position of the center
m arker w ithin 5% of the screen size.
MARKER switch*
Setting this sw itch to O N displays the center
m arker and safety zone indicatior (O N /O FF by
internal sw itch).
CONTRAST knob*
A djusts the contrast of the view finder picture.
BRIGHT knob*
A djusts the brightness of the view finder
picture.
*These controls do not affect the output signal of the video cam era.
PEAKING switch and knob*
Setting this sw itch to O N and turning the knob
corrects view finder im age.
U sed to adjust the focus on the video cam era.
left right
H
10
124
1. Set the tilt lock lever to the friction position.
2. Adjust the friction by tur ning the knob.
3. Adjust the tilt. After setting the tilt position, set the tilt lock
lever to the lock position.
Tilt knob
A djusts the tilt friction.
UP TALLY switch
W hen this sw itch is set to O N , the U P TA LLY
lam p lights in the sam e w ay as the R tally
lam p.
UP TALLY DIMMER control
A djusts the brightness of the U P TA LLY lam p.
Loosen
Lock position
Friction position
Tilt lock lever
Tilt knob
40 degrees
40 degrees
125
11 Specifications
B VP -9 0 0 with O H B -7 5 0 A in sta lle d )
Input connectors
MIC in XLR-3-pin (Female) x 2, phantom +48 V, Line
Ref in BNC type(with an optional standalon kit, BKP-7910)
DC in XLR-4-pin (Male, with an optional standalone kit,
BKP-7910)
RET control 6-pin
Output Connectors
Test out BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Prompter BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, input/output
Video out BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, (with an optional
standalone kit, BKP-7910)
Viewfinder connector D-sub 25-pin
DC out (script) 4-pin, 5 W/12 VDC
Intercom XLR-5-pin (Female) x 2, input/output
AC utlity out Max. 200 VA
Input/output connectors
CCU Kings type
Lens 36-pin
VTR 26-pin (with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910)
Tracker 10-pin
Remote1 8-pin (for RCP-700 series)
General
Msss (Approx.) 20 kg (44 lb 1 oz)
Dimensions (Approx.) 442 (L) x 381 (H) x 368 (W) mm
(17 1/2 x 15 x 14 1/2 inches)
Power consumption TBD
Storage temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F)
Suuplied accessories
Angle adjustment fittings x2
Front cover x1
Number plate for up tally (x1), for side panel (x2), for rear panel
(x1)
Belt for cable clamp x2
Operation manual x1
Maintenance manual x1
16:9/4:3 conversion board (supplied with OHB-750WSA/730WS)
Optional accessories
BVF-77, 7-inch monochrome viewfinder
BVF-7700, 7-inch color viewfinder
VFH-770, 7-inch viewfinder sport hood
BKP-7911/7912, Script holder
BKP-7910, Standalone kit
OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS, Integrated imaging capsule
Extension board
BKP-9901, System Manual
Recommended equipment
CCU-700A, Camera control unit
MSU-700, Master setup unit
RCP-740/741/730/731/720/721/700/701, Remote control panel
VCS-700, Video selector
CNU-700/500, Camera command network unit
B VP -9 5 0 with O H B -7 5 0 A in sta lle d )
Input connectors
MIC in XLR-3-pin (Female), phantom +48 V
Output connectors
Input/Output connectors
Viewfinder I/F 20-pin
Lens 12-pin
Camera adapter I/F 136-pin (68-pin x 2)
Remote 8-pin (for RCP-700 series and RM-B150)
OHB I/F 29-pin
General
Mass (Approx.) 3.7 kg (7 lb 5 oz) with BVF-10
Dimensions 302 (L) x 270 (H) x 127 (W) mm
(12 x 10 3/4 x 5 inches)
Operating tempertature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F)
Operation manual x1
16:9/4:3 coversion board (supplied with OHB-750WSA/730WS)
CA-570, Camera adaptor for CCU-700A/550
CA-550/1, Camera adaptor for CCU-700A/550
CA-553, Camera adaptor for use with BVV-5/DNV-5
CA-530, Camera adaptor for SDI output
OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS, Integrated imaging capsule
VCT-14, Tripod adaptor
BVF-10/20W/C10W, Viewfinder
BKP-9901, System manual
126
Specifications
11
C A -5 7 0 , C a m e ra a d a p to r
Connectors
MIC IN XLR-3-pin (Female), balanced, phantom +48 V
DC IN XLR-4-pin, (Male), 10.5 V to 17 V
DC OUT 4-pin, 10.5 V to 17 V, Max. 200 mA
REF IN BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
RET OUT BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
RETURN CONTROL 6-pin
EARPHONE Mini jack, 8 ohms
CAMERA I/F 68-pin
VTR 26-pin, (CCZ type)
CCU (TRIAX) Kings type
CCU (COAX) BNC type (option)
INCOM/PGM 2 ch, headset XLR-5-pin
RCP 8-pin (Female)
Tracker 10-pin
Transmission
8.5 mm cable 1000 m (Almost 0.6 mile, with CCU-700A)
14.5 mm cable 2000 m (Almost 1.2 miles, with CCU-700A)
General
Power requirments DC 12 V (10.5 V to 17 V)
Power consumption 10 W (with BVF-10)
Mass (Approx.) 2.5 kg (5 lb 8 oz)
(7 5/8 x 8 3/8 x 5 1/8 inches)
Opearting temperature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F)
Operation manual x1
Maintenece manual x1
Extension board x1
BVF-55, 5-inch B/W viewfinder
AC-550, AC adaptor
CCU-700A, Camera control unit
11 Specifications
127
O H B S p e c ific a tio n s
OHB-750A OHB-750WSA OHB-730 OHB-730WS
Pickup device system
Device configuration 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD
4:3 Standard 16:9/4:3 Switchable 4:3 Standard 16:9/4:3 Switchable
Picture elements 1038 (H) x 504 (V) 1038 (H) x 504 (V) 1038 (H) x 504 (V) 1038 (H) x 504 (V)
Optical spacifications
Specuram system F 1.4 prism system F 1.4 prism system F 1.4 prism system F 1.4 prism system
Servo control Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color filter-A Cross Cross Cross Cross
Color filter-B 3200K 3200K 3200K 3200K
Color filter-C 4300K 4300K 4300K 4300K
Color filter-D 6300K 6300K 6300K 6300K
Color filter-E 8000K 8000K 8000K 8000K
ND filter-1 Clear Clear Clear Clear
ND filter-2 1/4 ND 1/4 ND 1/4 ND 1/4 ND
Electrical characteristic
Sensitivity F 8.0 at 2000 lx F 10.0 at 2000 lx F 10.0 at 2000 lx F 10.0 at 2000 lx
(3200K 89.9 % reflectance) (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) (3200K 89.9 % reflectance)
Minimum subject illumination 7.8 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up)
S/N rato 65 dB 65 dB 65 dB 65 dB
Horizontal resolition 900 TVL 900 TVL 900 TVL 900 TVL
Vertical resolution 400 TVL 400 TVL 400 TVL 400 TVL
450 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS) 450 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS)
Geometric distortion Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense)
Shutter speed selection 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000 s 1/1000, 1/2000 s 1/1000, 1/2000 s 1/1000, 1/2000 s
Gain selection -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB
Clear scan selection 30.4 ~7000 Hz 30.4 ~7000 Hz 60.1 ~7000 Hz 60.1 ~7000 Hz
Modulation depth at 5 MHz 80 % (Typical) 80 % (Typical) 80 % (Typical) 80 % (Typical)
Power consumption (with BVP-950) 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W
DC input range 10.5 to 17 VDC 10.5 to 17 VDC 10.5 to 17 VDC 10.5 to 17 VDC
General
Operating temperature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F)
Storage temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F)
Specifications
11
128
C C U -7 0 0 A , C a m e ra C o n tro l U n it
Input/Output connector
Camera Triax (1), Kings type
Coax BNC type (1)
RCP/CNU 8-pin multi-connector (1)
AUX 8-pin multi-connector (1)
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM 19-pin multi-connector (1)
TALLY: 24 VDC, TTL level or contact selectable
MIC REMOTE D-sub 15-pin (1)
IMTERCOM REMOTE D-sub 25-pin (1)
INTERCOM (front panel) XLR-5-pin
AC power cord x1
Plug holder for theAC power cord x1
4-pin connectors x1
19-pin connectors x1
Number plate 1 set
Operation manual x1
Triax cable
BKP-7900, Extension board
BKP-7931, Sub-encoder board
BVP-900/950, Color video camera
CCA-5 Cables
C C U -5 5 0 , C a m e ra C o n tro l U n it
General
Power consumption 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maxmum 1 A
Cable length Max. 1,400 m (via 14.5 mm)
Operation temperature -10C to +40C (+14F to +104F)
(8 x 5 x 13 7/8 inches)
Mass (Approx.) 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz, with BKP-5972/5973 installed)
Input signals
Reference BNC type (loop-through)
VBS/BS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
RET 1/2/3 BNC type (1 each, loop-through)
Prompter BNC type (loop-through), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Output signals
Serial 1/2 BNC type (1 each), 4:2:2 component serial digital
(270 Mbps), 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms
VBS 1/2/3 BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Y/R-Y/B-Y video BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
R/G/B video BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms
PIX BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
WF 0.714 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
encoded output: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
WF MODE 4-pin (1)
MIC Output XLR-3-pin, 0 dBu/-20 dBu, balanced, 2 channels
Camera input/output signals
Camera Triax, Kings type (1)
Coax BNC type (1)
RCP/CNU remote 8-pin multi-connector
INCOM/TALLY/PGM D-sub 25-pin (1)
4W/RTS
MIC remote D-sub 15-pin (1)
INTERCOM (front panel) XLR-5-pin (1)
Operation manual x1
AC power cord x1
AC power plug holder x1
4-pin connectors x1
Number plate 1 set
Extension board
BKP-5972, SDI output board
BKP-5973, CCU control panel
BKP-5974, DC power unit
RMM-301, Rack mount adaptor
11 Specifications
129
B VF -7 7 0 0 , 7 -in c h C o lo r Vie wfin d e r
General
Power consumption 38 W
Operating humidity 20 % to 90 %
Storage humidity 20 % to 70 %
(10 1/2 x 7 1/2 x 14 1/4 inches)
Mass 6.3 kg (13 lb 14 oz)
CRT
CRT 7-inch super fine-pitch Trinitron tube
70-degree deflection, 125 (W) x 94 (H) mm
Effective size 116 (W) x 87 (H) mm
Deflection and high-voltage section
Luminance more than 154 cd/m2 (45 FL)
Horizontal resolution 420 lines at center, 300 lines at corner
Color temperature 6500K +8MPCD
Geometric distortion Zone A: less than 1 %, Zone B: less than 2 %
Convergence Zone A: less than 0.2 mm, Zone B: less than 0.3 mm
High-voltage regulation less than 1.0 %
High voltage 16 kV (nominal)
Input
Input voltage 10.5 to 17.0 VDC
Signal input R/B: 0.7 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated
G: 1.0 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated
Signal
Color system NTSC,PAL (automatic,preset)
Video signal
DC playback Back poach type
Back poach level: Peaking value 3 %
Frequency response 100 Hz to 6 MHz (+/-3 dB)
Peaking 0 dB to more than 15 dB (4 MHz)
Sync
Sync signal Line pull range
Horizontal: more than +/-500 Hz
Vertical: more than -10 Hz
Line hold range: +/-500 Hz
Indoor hood x1
Number plate x1
Fuse x1
Screws x2
Operation and maintenancemanual x1
B VF -7 7 , 7 -in c h B /W Vie wfin d e r
CRT 7-inch monochrome
160(W) x 131(H) mm
(6 3/8 x 5 1/4 inches)
90-degree deflection
Picture size 120 (W) x 90 (H) mm
(4 3/4 x 3 5/8 inches)
Brightness 500 NIT
Resolution 800 lines at center, 600 lines at corner
Geometric distortion Less than 1.0 %
EHT regulation Less than +/-2 %
EHT voltage 13.5 kV (standard)
Power sources 10.5 V to 17.0 VDC
Video input 1.0 Vp-p, -6/+4 dB,sync negative,
75 ohms, terminated
DC restoration Back poach type
10 to 90 % APL
Frequency response 0.1 MHz to 8 MHz (+/-3 dB)
Apature correction 0 dB to 15 dB (4MHz)
Synchronization Line pull range
line hold range: more than +/-500 Hz
Retrace time Horizontal: less than 15 %
Vertical: less than 5 %
Blanking time Horizontal: less than 16 %
Power consumption 23 VA
Mass 5.0 kg (11 lb, excluding hood)
(10 1/2 x 7 1/8 x 14 3/8 inches)
Indoor hood x1
Number plate x1
Screws x2
Fuse x1
Specifications
11
130
B VF -5 5 , 5 -in c h B /W Vie wfin d e r
Screen size: 73 (H) x 97 (V) mm
(2 7/8 x 3 7/8 inches)
Video signal EIA standard
Scanning 2:1 interlace, 525 lines
5 % underscanning
Horizontal linearity error: less than 3 %
Vertical linerarity error: less than 3 %
Resolution More than 650 TV lines at center
More than 550 TV lines at corner
Input 12-pin connector
Video input: 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative,
1 k ohms
Geometric distortion Less than 3 %
Frequency response -3 dB at 10 MHz
Power requirements 10.5 V to 17 VDC, nominal 12 VDC
Operating temperature -10C to +50C (+14F to +122F)
Operating humidity 0 to 90 %, non-condensing
Operating altitude (Approx.) 3,050 m (10,000 ft)
Mass (Approx.) 2.5 kg (4 lb 2 oz, with stand)
(7 5/8 x 7 3/4 x 11 1/2 inches)
Slide shoe x1
V wedge shoe attachment x1
Screws 1 set
Hexagon wrench x1
Connecting cable x1
Studio monitor hood x1
B VF -2 0 W, E le c tric B /W C R T Vie wfin d e r
General
Power consumption 9.3 VDC
Power requirements 2.3 W
Storage temoerature -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F)
External dimensions 239 (W) x 76 (H) x 206.5 (D) mm
(9 1/2 x 3 1/4 x 8 1/4 inches)
Performance
Indicators REC/TALLY, BATT, VTR, SAVE, !
Microphone x1
Operation manual x1
BKW-L401, viewfinder rotation bracket
Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11)
Lens assembly (farsighted, -2.8D to +2.0D, Part No. A-8262-537-A)
Lens assembly (low magnification, -3.6D to -0.8D, Part No. A-8262-538-A)
Lens assembly (standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations)
(-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8267-737-A)
Lens assembly (high-performance triple magnification)
(-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8314-798-A)
Coushoned eyecup: Pad (Part No. X-3678-187-A)
Attachment (Part No. 3-682-494-02)
B VF -1 0 , E le c tric B /W Vie wfin d e r
General
Power reqirements 9.3 VDC
External Dimensions 229 (W) x 76 (H) x 215 (D) mm
(9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches)
Performance
Microphone x1
operation manual x1
11 Specifications
131
B VP -9 0 0 P with O H B -7 5 0 A P in sta lle d )
Input connectors
MIC in XLR-3-pin (Female) x 2, phantom +48 V, Line
Ref in BNC type(with an optional standalon kit, BKP-7910P)
DC in XLR-4-pin (Male, with an optional standalone kit,
BKP-7910P)
RET control 6-pin
Output Connectors
Prompter BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, input/output
Video out BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, (with an optional
standalone kit, BKP-7910P)
Viewfinder connector D-sub 25-pin
DC out (script) 4-pin, 5 W/12 VDC
Intercom XLR-5-pin (Female) x 2, input/output
AC utlity out Max. 200 VA
Input/output connectors
CCU Fischer type
Lens 36-pin
VTR 26-pin (with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910P)
Tracker 10-pin
Remote1 8-pin (for RCP-700 series)
General
Msss (Approx.) 20 kg (44 lb 1 oz)
Dimensions (Approx.) 442 (L) x 381 (H) x 368 (W) mm
(17 1/2 x 15 x 14 1/2 inches)
Power consumption TBD
Angle adjustment fittings x2
Front cover x1
Number plate for up tally (x1), for side panel (x2), for rear panel (x1)
Belt for cable clamp x2
Operation manual x1
16:9/4:3 conversion board (supplied with OHB-750WSAP/730WSP)
BVF-77CE, 7-inch monochrome viewfinder
BVF-7700P, 7-inch color viewfinder
BKP-7911/7912, Script holder
BKP-7910P, Standalone kit
OHB-750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP, Integrated imaging capsule
Extension board
BKP-9901, System Manual
CCU-700AP, Camera control unit
B VP -9 5 0 P with O H B -7 5 0 A P in sta lle d )
Input connectors
MIC in XLR-3-pin (Female), phantom +48 V
Output connectors
Input/Output connectors
Viewfinder I/F 20-pin
Lens 12-pin
Camera adapter I/F 136-pin (68-pin x 2)
Remote 8-pin (for RCP-700 series and RM-B150)
OHB I/F 29-pin
General
Mass (Approx.) 3.7 kg (7 lb 5 oz) with BVF-10CE
(12 x 10 3/4 x 5 inches)
Operating tempertature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F)
Operation manual x1
16:9/4:3 coversion board (supplied with OHB-750WSAP/730WSP)
CA-570P, Camera adaptor for CCU-700AP/550P
CA-550P/1, Camera adaptor for CCU-700AP/550P
CA-553, Camera adaptor for use with BVV-5PS/DNV-5
CA-530, Camera adaptor for SDI output
OHB-750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP, Integrated imaging capsule
VCT-14, Tripod adaptor
BVF-10CE/20WCE/C10W, Viewfinder
BKP-9901, System manual
Specifications
11
132
C A -5 7 0 P, C a m e ra a d a p to r
Connectors
MIC IN XLR-3-pin (Female), balanced, phantom +48 V
DC IN XLR-4-pin, (Male), 10.5 V to 17 V
DC OUT 4-pin, 10.5 V to 17 V, Max. 200 mA
REF IN BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
RET OUT BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
RETURN CONTROL 6-pin
EARPHONE Mini jack, 8 ohms
CAMERA I/F 68-pin
VTR 26-pin, (CCZ type)
CCU (TRIAX) Fischer type
CCU (COAX) BNC type (option)
INCOM/PGM 2 ch, headset XLR-5-pin
RCP 8-pin (Female)
Tracker 10-pin
Transmission
8.5 mm cable 1000 m (Almost 0.6 mile, with CCU-700AP)
14.5 mm cable 2000 m (Almost 1.2 miles, with CCU-700AP)
General
Power requirments DC 12 V (10.5 V to 17 V)
Power consumption 10 W (with BVF-10CE)
Mass (Approx.) 2.5 kg (5 lb 8 oz)
(7 5/8 x 8 3/8 x 5 1/8 inches)
Opearting temperature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F)
Operation manual x1
Maintenece manual x1
Extension board x1
BVF-55CE, 5-inch B/W viewfinder
AC-550CE, AC adaptor
CCU-700AP, Camera control unit
11 Specifications
133
O H B S p e c ific a tio n s
OHB-750AP OHB-750WSAP OHB-730P OHB-730WSP
Pickup device system
Device configuration 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD
4:3 Standard 16:9/4:3 Switchable 4:3 Standard 16:9/4:3 Switchable
Picture elements 1038 (H) x 594 (V) 1038 (H) x 594 (V) 1038 (H) x 594 (V) 1038 (H) x 594 (V)
Optical spacifications
Specuram system F 1.4 prism system F 1.4 prism system F 1.4 prism system F 1.4 prism system
Servo control Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color filter-A Cross Cross Cross Cross
Color filter-B 3200K 3200K 3200K 3200K
Color filter-C 4300K 4300K 4300K 4300K
Color filter-D 6300K 6300K 6300K 6300K
Color filter-E 8000K 8000K 8000K 8000K
ND filter-1 Clear Clear Clear Clear
Electrical characteristic
Sensitivity F 8.0 at 2000 lx F 10.0 at 2000 lx F 10.0 at 2000 lx F 10.0 at 2000 lx
(3200K 89.9 % reflectance) (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) (3200K 89.9 % reflectance)
Minimum subject illumination 7.8 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up)
S/N rato 63 dB 63 dB 63 dB 63 dB
Horizontal resolition 900 TVL 900 TVL 900 TVL 900 TVL
Vertical resolution 480 TVL 480 TVL 480 TVL 480 TVL
530 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS) 530 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS)
Geometric distortion Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense)
Shutter speed selection 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000 s 1/1000, 1/2000 s 1/1000, 1/2000 s 1/1000, 1/2000 s
Gain selection -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB
Clear scan selection 25.4 ~9000 Hz 25.4 ~9000 Hz 50.2 ~9000 Hz 50.2 ~9000 Hz
Modulation depth at 5 MHz 80 % (Typical) 80 % (Typical) 80 % (Typical) 80 % (Typical)
Power consumption (with BVP-950) 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W
DC input range 10.5 to 17 VDC 10.5 to 17 VDC 10.5 to 17 VDC 10.5 to 17 VDC
General
Operating temperature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F)
Storage temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F)
Specifications
11
134
C C U -7 0 0 A P, C a m e ra C o n tro l U n it
Input/Output connector
Camera Triax (1), Fischer type
Coax BNC type (1)
RCP/CNU 8-pin multi-connector (1)
AUX 8-pin multi-connector (1)
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM 19-pin multi-connector (1)
MIC REMOTE D-sub 15-pin (1)
IMTERCOM REMOTE D-sub 25-pin (1)
INTERCOM (front panel) XLR-5-pin
AC power cord x1
4-pin connectors x1
19-pin connectors x1
Number plate 1 set
Operation manual x1
Triax cable
BKP-7900, Extension board
BKP-7931, Sub-encoder board
BVP-900P/950P, Color video camera
CCA-5 Cables
C C U -5 5 0 P, C a m e ra C o n tro l U n it
General
Power consumption 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maxmum 1 A
Cable length Max. 1,400 m (via 14.5 mm)
Operation temperature -10C to +40C (+14F to +104F)
(8 x 5 x 13 7/8 inches)
Mass (Approx.) 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz, with BKP-5972/5973 installed)
Input signals
Reference BNC type (loop-through)
RET 1/2/3 BNC type (1 each, loop-through)
Prompter BNC type (loop-through), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Output signals
Serial 1/2 BNC type (1 each), 4:2:2 component serial digital
(270 Mbps), 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms
VBS 1/2/3 BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Y/R-Y/B-Y video BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
R/G/B video BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms
PIX BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
WF 0.714 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
encoded output: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
WF MODE 4-pin (1)
MIC Output XLR-3-pin, 0 dBu/-20 dBu, balanced, 2 channels
Camera input/output signals
Camera Triax, Fischer type (1)
Coax BNC type (1)
RCP/CNU remote 8-pin multi-connector
INCOM/TALLY/PGM D-sub 25-pin (1)
4W/RTS
MIC remote D-sub 15-pin (1)
INTERCOM (front panel) XLR-5-pin (1)
Operation manual x1
AC power cord x1
AC power plug holder x1
4-pin connectors x1
Number plate 1 set
Extension board
BKP-5972, SDI output board
BKP-5973, CCU control panel
BKP-5974, DC power unit
RMM-301, Rack mount adaptor
11 Specifications
135
B VF -7 7 0 0 P, 7 -in c h C o lo r Vie wfin d e r
General
Power consumption 38 W
Operating humidity 20 % to 90 %
Storage humidity 20 % to 70 %
(10 1/2 x 7 1/2 x 14 1/4 inches)
CRT
CRT 7-inch super fine-pitch Trinitron tube
70-degree deflection, 125 (W) x 94 (H) mm
Effective size 116 (W) x 87 (H) mm
Deflection and high-voltage section
Luminance more than 154 cd/m2 (45 FL)
Horizontal resolution 420 lines at center, 300 lines at corner
Color temperature 6500K +8MPCD
Geometric distortion Zone A: less than 1 %, Zone B: less than 2 %
Convergence Zone A: less than 0.2 mm, Zone B: less than 0.3 mm
High-voltage regulation less than 1.0 %
High voltage 16 kV (nominal)
Input
Input voltage 10.5 to 17.0 VDC
Signal input R/B: 0.7 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated
G: 1.0 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated
Signal
Color system NTSC,PAL (automatic,preset)
Video signal
DC playback Back poach type
Frequency response 100 Hz to 6 MHz (+/-3 dB)
Peaking 0 dB to more than 15 dB (4 MHz)
Sync
Sync signal Line pull range
Line hold range: +/-500 Hz
Indoor hood x1
Number plate x1
Fuse x1
Screws x2
B VF -7 7 C E , 7 -in c h B /W Vie wfin d e r
160(W) x 131(H) mm
(6 3/8 x 5 1/4 inches)
90-degree deflection
Picture size 120 (W) x 90 (H) mm
(4 3/4 x 3 5/8 inches)
Brightness 500 NIT
Resolution 800 lines at center, 600 lines at corner
Geometric distortion Less than 1.0 %
EHT regulation Less than +/-2 %
EHT voltage 13.5 kV (standard)
Power sources 10.5 V to 17.0 VDC
Video input 1.0 Vp-p, -6/+4 dB,sync negative,
75 ohms, terminated
DC restoration Back poach type
10 to 90 % APL
Frequency response 0.1 MHz to 8 MHz (+/-3 dB)
Apature correction 0 dB to 15 dB (4MHz)
Synchronization Line pull range
line hold range: more than +/-500 Hz
Retrace time Horizontal: less than 15 %
Blanking time Horizontal: less than 16 %
Mass 5.0 kg (11 lb, excluding hood)
(10 1/2 x 7 1/8 x 14 3/8 inches)
Indoor hood x1
Number plate x1
Screws x2
Fuse x1
Specifications
11
136
B VF -5 5 C E , 5 -in c h B /W Vie wfin d e r
Screen size: 73 (H) x 97 (V) mm
(2 7/8 x 3 7/8 inches)
Video signal CCIR standard
Scanning 2:1 interlace, 525 lines
5 % underscanning
Horizontal linearity error: less than 3 %
Vertical linerarity error: less than 3 %
Resolution More than 650 TV lines at center
More than 550 TV lines at corner
Input 12-pin connector
Video input: 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative,
1 k ohms
Geometric distortion Less than 3 %
Frequency response -3 dB at 10 MHz
Power requirements 10.5 V to 17 VDC, nominal 12 VDC
Operating temperature -10C to +50C (+14F to +122F)
Operating humidity 0 to 90 %, non-condensing
Operating altitude (Approx.) 3,050 m (10,000 ft)
Mass (Approx.) 2.5 kg (4 lb 2 oz, with stand)
(7 5/8 x 7 3/4 x 11 1/2 inches)
Slide shoe x1
V wedge shoe attachment x1
Screws 1 set
Hexagon wrench x1
Connecting cable x1
Studio monitor hood x1
B VF -2 0 WC E , E le c tric B /W C R T Vie wfin d e r
General
Power consumption 9.3 VDC
Power requirements 2.3 W
Storage temoerature -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F)
External dimensions 239 (W) x 76 (H) x 206.5 (D) mm
(9 1/2 x 3 1/4 x 8 1/4 inches)
Performance
Indicators REC/TALLY, BATT, VTR, SAVE, !
Microphone x1
Operation manual x1
BKW-L401, viewfinder rotation bracket
Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11)
Lens assembly (farsighted, -2.8D to +2.0D, Part No. A-8262-537-A)
Lens assembly (low magnification, -3.6D to -0.8D, Part No. A-8262-538-A)
Lens assembly (standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations)
(-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8267-737-A)
Lens assembly (high-performance triple magnification)
(-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8314-798-A)
Coushoned eyecup: Pad (Part No. X-3678-187-A)
Attachment (Part No. 3-682-494-02)
B VF -1 0 C E , E le c tric B /W Vie wfin d e r
General
Power reqirements 9.3 VDC
External Dimensions 229 (W) x 76 (H) x 215 (D) mm
(9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches)
Performance
Signal system CCIR standards
Microphone x1
operation manual x1
11 Specifications
137
M S U -7 0 0 , M a ste r S e tu p U n it
General
Power requirements In United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
In other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption For USA and Canada: Max. 0.45 A
For other countries: Max. 0.30 A
Maxmum cable length 200 m (656 ft)
Operating temperature 0C to +45C (+32F to +113F)
(19 x 8 3/4 x 2 3/4 inches)
Mass 4.5 kg (9lb 15 oz)
Inputs/outputs
Remote CCU/CNU: 8-pin multi-connector
AUX: 8-pin multi-connector
I/O port 50-pin
AC IN 3-pin
AC power cord x1
Plug holder for AC power cord x1
Spare fuse x1
Operation manual x1
VC S -7 0 0 , Vid e o se le c to r
General
Power requirements In United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
In other coutries: 220 to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption For USA and Canada: Max 0.28A
For other countries: Max.0.28 A
(16 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 15 3/4 inches)
Input Connectors
PIX 1 to PIX 6 INPUT BNC type (6), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms
WF 1to WF 6 INPUT BNC type (6),
For USA and Canada: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms
For other countries: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms
PIX A INPUT BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms
WF A INPUT BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms
CHARACTER INPUT BNC type (1, with loop-through output), 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75ohms
AC IN 3-pin (1)
Output connectors
PIX A and PIX B OUTPUT BNC type (1 each), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms
WF A and WF B OUTUT For USA and Canada: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms
For other coutries: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/ 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms
SYNC OUTPUT BNC type (1), 0.3 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms, negative polarity
WF MODE Round 4-pin connector (1)
Remote connectors
REMOTE 8-pin multi-connector (1)
I/O PORT D-sub 37-pin (1)
AC power cord x1
4-pin connector x1
Operation manual x1
C N U -7 0 0 , C a m e ra C o m m a n d N e two rk U n it
General
Power requirements For United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
For other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption Max.4.0 A
(16 3/4 x 5 1/4 x 15 3/4 inches)
Input and output connectors
CCU 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each)
RCP 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each)
MSU 8-pin multi-connector (1)
VCS 8-pin multi-connector (1)
AUX 1 and 2 8-pin multi-connector (1 each)
CHARACTER BNC type (2), video: 0.7 Vp-p, sync: 0.3 Vp-p
REFERENCE BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with loop-through output
RS232C D-sub 9-pin
AC IN 3-pin (1)
Suplied accessories
AC power cord x1
Operation manual x1
C N U -5 0 0 , C a m e ra C o m m a n d N e two rk U n it
General
Power requirements For United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
For other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption Max.4.0 A
(16 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 15 3/4 inches)
Mass 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz)
Input and output connectors
CCU 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each)
RCP 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1 each)
MSU 8-pin multi-connector (1)
VCS 8-pin multi-connector (1)
AUX 1 and 2 8-pin multi-connector (1 each)
CHARACTER BNC type (2), video: 0.7 Vp-p, sync: 0.3 Vp-p
REFERENCE BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with loop-through output
RS232C D-sub 9-pin
AC IN 3-pin (1)
Suplied accessories
AC power cord x1
Operation manual x1
000X000
1 2 3
00
/00
00
/00
00
/00
BK
Specifications
11
138
R C P -7 0 0 /7 0 1 /7 2 0 /7 2 1 /7 3 0 /7 3 1 /7 4 0 /7 4 1 , R e m o te C o n trl P a n e l
Connectors
REMOTE CCU/CNU: 8-Pin
PREVIEW: 8-Pin
I/Oport: 29-pin
Mass RCP-700:1.0 kg (2 lb 3 oz)
RCP-701: 0.9 kg (2 lb)
RCP-720: 1.8 kg (3 lb 15 oz)
RCP-721: 1.7 kg (3 lb 12 oz)
RCP-730: 1.8 kg (4 lb)
RCP-731: 1.9 kg (4 lb 3 oz)
RCP-740: 2.3 kg (5 lb 1 oz)
RCP-741: 2.2 kg (4 lb 14 oz)
Dimensions
RCP-700: 68 (W) x 221 (H) x 127 (D) mm
(2 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 5 inches)
RCP-701: 68 (W) x 221 (H) x 83 (D) mm
(2 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 3 3/8 inches)
RCP-720: 102 (W) x 354 (H) x 127 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 14 x 5 inches)
RCP-721: 102 (W) x 354 (H) x 83 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches)
RCP-730: 102 (W) x 332 (H) x 67 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 13 1/8 x 2 3/4 inches)
RCP-731: 102 (W) x 332 (H) x 67 (D) mm
(4 1/8 x 13 1/8 x 2 3/4 inches)
RCP-740: 136 (W) x 354 (H) x 127 (D) mm
(5 3/8 x 14 x 5 inches)
RCP-741: 136 (W) x 354 (H) x 83 (D) mm
(5 3/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches)
B VF -C 1 0 W, E le c tro n ic C o lo r Vie wfin d e r
General
Power requirements 9.3 VDC
Storagetemperature -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F)
(9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches)
Performance
Microphone x1
Operation manual x1
CONTENTS
1
1
2
3
4
5
INTRODUCTION
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
1-1. Overview
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
1-2. Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) using 12-bit A/D Conversion
...................................................................................................
3
1-3. Sony Design Criteria for Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) Cameras
.......................................................................................
3
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
...............................................................................................................................................................................................
5
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
A TOTAL SYSTEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
2-2. Camera Head
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
2-4. Control System
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
2-5. Viewfinders
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
..................................................................................................................................................................
12
...................................................................................................................................................
12
..................................................................................................................................................................................
13
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
...............................................................................................................
17
...............................................................................................................................................................................
17
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
.................................................................................................................................................
18
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
.......................................................................................................................................................
19
....................................................................................................................................................................
19
SONY ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ADSP)
..................................................................................................................
20
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
4-2. Image Capture
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
...........................................................................................................................................................................................
21
.............................................................................................................................................................................................
21
......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
..................................................................................................................................................................................
24
..................................................................................................................................................................
29
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................
29
Sony Corporation
printed in Japan SONY
NTSC / PAL
Studio/OB/EFP Camera Family
BVP-900/950 900P/950P Series
Product Information Manual
S
t
u
d
i
o
/
O
B
/
E
F
P

C
a
m
e
r
a

F
a
m
i
l
y
P
r
o
d
u
c
t

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

M
a
n
u
a
l
B
V
P
-
9
0
0
/
9
5
0

9
0
0
P
/
9
5
0
P

S
e
r
i
e
s
MK7171V1SMC99JAN
000X000
1 2 3
00
/00
00
/00
00
/00
BK Y M C

bvp900 950 Pim

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

bvp900 950 Pim

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Sony Corporation

printed in Japan SONY

Figure 5-3 Knee curve image

Category Subcategory Item Setting Contents

S-ar putea să vă placă și